Isoxazolines as inhibitors of fatty acid amide hydrolase

ABSTRACT

The present invention provides isoxazoline FAAH inhibitors of the formula (I): 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
         
         
           
             or pharmaceutically acceptable forms thereof, wherein each of G, R a , R b , R c , and R d  are as defined herein. 
           
         
       
    
     The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient. 
     The present invention also provides methods for treating an FAAH-mediated condition comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, to a subject in need thereof.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application claims priority to U.S. provisional patent application Ser. No. 61/179,280 filed May 18, 2009, the entirety of which is hereby incorporated herein by reference.

SEQUENCE LISTING

In accordance with 37 CFR 1.52(e)(5), a Sequence Listing in the form of a text file (entitled “SequenceListing.txt,” created on Jul. 27, 2010, and 6 kilobytes) is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND

Fatty acid amide hydrolase (FAAH), also referred to as oleamide hydrolase and anandamide amidohydrolase, is an integral membrane protein responsible for the hydrolysis of several important endogenous neuromodulating fatty acid amides (FAAs), including anadamide, oleoylethanolamide and palmitoylethanolamide, and is intimately involved in their regulation. Because these FAAs interact with cannabinoid and vanilliod receptors, they are often referred to as “endocannabinoids” or “endovanilliods”. Initial interest in this area focused on developing FAAH inhibitors to augment the actions of FAAs and reduce pain. Further investigation found FAAH inhibitors, through interactions of the FAAs with unique extracellular and intracellular receptors, can be used to treat a variety of conditions that include, but are not limited to, inflammation, metabolic disorders (e.g., obesity-related conditions and wasting conditions such as cachexias and anorexia), disorders of the central nervous system (e.g., disorders associated with neurotoxicity and/or neurotrauma, stroke, multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, movement disorders such as basal ganglia disorders, amylotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease, epilepsy, mental disorders such as anxiety, depression, learning disorders and Schizophrenia, sleep disorders such as insomnia, nausea and/or emesis, and drug addiction), cardiac disorders (e.g., hypertention, circulatory shock, myocardial reperfusion injury and atherosclerosis) and glaucoma (Pacher et al., “The Endocannabinoid System as an Emerging Target of Pharmacotherapy” Pharmacological Reviews (2006) 58:389-462; Pillarisetti et al., “Pain and Beyond: Fatty Acid Amides and Fatty Acid Amide Hydrolase Inhibitors in Cardiovascular and Metabolic Diseases” Drug Discovery Today (2009) 597:1-14).

SUMMARY

The present invention provides isoxazoline FAAH inhibitor compounds of the formula (I):

or pharmaceutically acceptable forms thereof,

wherein:

each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from H, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, R^(d) is the group -L-Z, and Z is selected from C₆₋₁₄ aryl;

L is a covalent bond or a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms;

G is selected from —CN, —NO₂, —S(═O)R^(e), —SO₂R^(e), —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂R^(e), —PO₂OR^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)R^(e), —(C═O)OR^(e), —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —Br, —I, —F, —Cl, —OR^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —SR^(e), —OSO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —OPO₂R^(e), —OPO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))OR^(e), —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion;

each R^(e) is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl and 5-14 membered heteroaryl; each R^(f) attached to a nitrogen atom is, independently, selected from —H, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, or an amino protecting group; or R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring or an 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring.

The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

The present invention also provides methods for treating an FAAH-mediated condition in a subject comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, to a subject in need thereof.

The details of additional embodiments of the invention are set forth in the accompanying Detailed Description and Exemplification as described below. Other features, objects, and advantages of the invention will be apparent from this description and from the claims.

DEFINITIONS

Definitions of specific functional groups ad chemical terms are described in more detail below. The chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75^(th) Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in Organic Chemistry, Thomas Sorrell, University Science Books, Sausalito, 1999; Smith and March March's Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5^(th) Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2001; Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1989; and Carruthers, Some Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, 3^(rd) Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1987.

Certain compounds of the present invention can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers. The compounds provided herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention are enantiopure compounds. In certain other embodiments, mixtures of stereoisomers are provided.

Furthermore, certain compounds, as described herein may have one or more double bonds that can exist as either the cis or trans, or the E or Z isomer, unless otherwise indicated. The invention additionally encompasses the compounds as individual isomers substantially free of other isomers, and alternatively, as mixtures of various isomers, e.g., racemic mixtures of E/Z isomers or mixtures enriched in one E/Z isomer.

The terms “enantiomerically enriched,” “enantiomerically pure” and “non-racemic,” as used interchangeably herein, refer to compositions in which the percent by weight of one enantiomer is greater than the amount of that one enantiomer in a control mixture of the racemic composition (e.g., greater than 1:1 by weight). For example, an enantiomerically enriched preparation of the (S)-enantiomer, means a preparation of the compound having greater than 50% by weight of the (S)-enantiomer relative to the (R)-enantiomer, more preferably at least 75% by weight, and even more preferably at least 80% by weight. In some embodiments, the enrichment can be much greater than 80% by weight, providing a “substantially enantiomerically enriched,” “substantially enantiomerically pure” or a “substantially non-racemic” preparation, which refers to preparations of compositions which have at least 85% by weight of one enantiomer relative to other enantiomer, more preferably at least 90% by weight, and even more preferably at least 95% by weight. In preferred embodiments, the enantiomerically enriched composition has a higher potency with respect to therapeutic utility per unit mass than does the racemic mixture of that composition. Enantiomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred enantiomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981); Wilen, S. H., et al., Tetrahedron 33:2725 (1977); Eliel, E. L. Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962); and Wilen, S. H. Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions p. 268 (E. L. Eliel, Ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, Ind. 1972).

When a range of values is listed, it is intended to encompass each value and sub-range within the range. For example “C₁₋₆ alkyl” is intended to encompass, C₁, C₂, C₃, C₄, C₅, C₆, C₁₋₆, C₁₋₅, C₁₋₄, C₁₋₃, C₁₋₂, C₂₋₆, C₂₋₅, C₂₋₄, C₂₋₃, C₃₋₆, C₃₋₅, C₃₋₄, C₄₋₆, C₄₋₅, and C₅₋₆ alkyl.

As used herein a “direct bond” or “covalent bond” refers to a single bond joining two groups.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “halo” and “halogen” refer to fluorine (fluoro, —F), chlorine (chloro, —Cl), bromine (bromo, —Br), or iodine (iodo, —I).

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “alkyl” refers to a monoradical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₁₀ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 9 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₉ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₈ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 7 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₇ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₆ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₅ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₄ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₃ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₂ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom (“C₁ alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₆ alkyl”). Examples of C₁₋₆ alkyl groups include methyl (C₁), ethyl (C₂), n-propyl (C₃), isopropyl (C₃), n-butyl (C₄), tert-butyl (C₄), sec-butyl (C₄), iso-butyl (C₄), n-pentyl (C₅), 3-pentanyl (C₅), amyl (C₅), neopentyl (C₅), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C₅), tertiary amyl (C₅), and n-hexyl (C₆). Additional examples of alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C₇), n-octyl (C₈) and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkyl”) are substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is an unsubstituted C₁₋₁₀ alkyl (e.g., —CH₃). In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is a substituted C₁₋₁₀ alkyl.

“Perhaloalkyl” as defined herein refers to an alkyl group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms wherein all of the hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced halogen, e.g., selected from fluoro, bromo, chloro or iodo (“C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₈ perhaloalkyl”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₄ perhaloalkyl”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₃ perhaloalkyl”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₂ perhaloalkyl”). In some embodiments, all of the hydrogen atoms are each replaced with fluoro. In some embodiments, all of the hydrogen atoms are each replaced with chloro. Examples of perhaloalkyl groups include —CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₂CF₃, —CCl₃, —CFCl₂, —CF₂Cl and the like.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “alkenyl” refers to a monoradical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (“C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₉ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₈ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₇ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₆ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₅ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₄ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₃ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms (“C₂ alkenyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl). Examples of C₂₋₄ alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C₂), 1-propenyl (C₃), 2-propenyl (C₃), 1-butenyl (C₄), 2-butenyl (C₄), butadienyl (C₄) and the like. Examples of C₂₋₆ alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C₂₋₄ alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C₅), pentadienyl (C₅), hexenyl (C₆) and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C₇), octenyl (C₈), octatrienyl (C₈) and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkenyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkenyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkenyl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is an unsubstituted C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is a substituted C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “alkynyl” refers to a monoradical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (“C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₉ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₈ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₇ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₆ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₅ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₄ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C₂₋₃ alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atom (“C₂ alkynyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl). Examples of C₂₋₄ alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C₂), 1-propynyl (C₃), 2-propynyl (C₃), 1-butynyl (C₄), 2-butynyl (C₄) and the like. Examples of C₂₋₆ alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C₂₋₄ alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C₅), hexynyl (C₆) and the like. Additional examples of alkynyl include heptynyl (C₇), octynyl (C₈) and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkynyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkynyl”) or substituted (a “substituted alkynyl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is an unsubstituted C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is a substituted C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl.

A “divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group” is a divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group, divalent C₁₋₆ alkenyl group or divalent C₁ alkynyl group wherein one, two or three methylene units (—CH₂—) of the hydrocarbon chain are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms. In certain embodiments, the divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group is a divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group. In certain embodiments, the divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group (e.g., an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group).

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “alkoxy” refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, substituted with an oxygen atom, wherein the point of attachment is the oxygen atom. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₁₀ alkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₈ alkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₆ alkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₄ alkoxy”). Examples of C₁₋₄ alkoxy groups include methoxy (C₁), ethoxy (C₂), propoxy (C₃), isopropoxy (C₃), butoxy (C₄), tert-butoxy (C₅) and the like. Examples of C₁₋₆ alkoxy groups include the aforementioned C₁₋₄ alkoxy groups as well as pentyloxy (C₅), isopentyloxy (C₅), neopentyloxy (C₅), hexyloxy (C₆) and the like. Additional examples of alkoxy groups include heptyloxy (C₇), octyloxy (C₈) and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of the alkyl moiety of the alkoxy group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted alkoxy”) or substituted (a “substituted alkoxy”) are substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the alkoxy group is an unsubstituted C₂₋₁₀ alkoxy (e.g., —OCH₃). In certain embodiments, the alkoxy group is a substituted C₂₋₁₀ alkoxy (e.g., perhaloalkoxy as defined herein).

“Perhaloalkoxy” refers to an alkoxy group wherein the all the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl moiety are each independently replaced with halogen atoms selected from fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo. In certain embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₈ perhaloalkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₆ perhaloalkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₄ perhaloalkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₃ perhaloalkoxy”). In some embodiments, the alkyl moiety has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“C₁₋₂ perhaloalkoxy”). In some embodiments, all of the hydrogen atoms are each replaced with fluoro. In some embodiments, all of the hydrogen atoms are each replaced with chloro. Examples of perhaloalkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, —OCF₃, —OCF₂CF₃, —OCF₂CF₂CF₃, —OCCl₃, —OCFCl₂, —OCF₂Cl and the like.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “carbocyclyl” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl”) and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system. In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₈ carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₆ carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₆ carbocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C₅₋₁₀ carbocyclyl”). Examples of C₃₋₆ carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C₃), cyclobutyl (C₄), cyclopentyl (C₅), cyclopentenyl (C₅), cyclohexyl (C₆), cyclohexenyl (C₆), cyclohexadienyl (C₆) and the like. Examples of C₃₋₈ carbocyclyl groups include the aforementioned C₃₋₆ carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C₇), cycloheptadienyl (C₇), cycloheptatrienyl (C₇), cyclooctyl (C₈), bicyclo[2.2.1]heptanyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl, and the like. Examples of C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl groups include the aforementioned C₃₋₈ carbocyclyl groups as well as octahydro-1H-indenyl, decahydronaphthalenyl, spiro[4.5]decanyl and the like. As the foregoing examples illustrate, in certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic carbocyclyl”) or polycyclic (e.g., containing a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic carbocyclyl”) or tricyclic system (“tricyclic carbocyclyl”)) and can be saturated or can contain one or more carbon-carbon double or triple bonds. “Carbocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted carbocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted carbocyclyl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is an unsubstituted C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl.

In some embodiments, “carbocyclyl” is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₁₀ cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C₅₋₆ cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms (“C₅₋₁₀ cycloalkyl”). Examples of C₅₋₆ cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C₅) and cyclohexyl (C₅). Examples of C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C₅₋₆ cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C₃) and cyclobutyl (C₄). Examples of C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C₃₋₆ cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C₇) and cyclooctyl (C₈). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted cycloalkyl”) or substituted (a “substituted cycloalkyl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is an unsubstituted C₃₋₁₀ cycloalkyl. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is a substituted C₃₋₁₀ cycloalkyl.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “heterocyclyl” refers to a radical of a 3- to 14-membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“3-14 membered heterocyclyl”). In heterocyclyl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. A heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic (“monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or polycyclic (e.g., a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic heterocyclyl”) or tricyclic system (“tricyclic heterocyclyl”)), and can be saturated or can contain one or more carbon-carbon double or triple bonds. Heterocyclyl polycyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. “Heterocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the heterocycyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocycyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocycyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring. In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-8 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-6 membered heterocyclyl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyls containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl. Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyls containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyls containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyls containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxathiolanyl and dithiolanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyls containing 3 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl. Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl. Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl. Exemplary bicyclic heterocyclyl groups include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, tetrahydrobenzothienyl, tetrahydrobenzofuranyl, tetrahydroindolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, decahydroisoquinolinyl, octahydrochromenyl, octahydroisochromenyl, decahydronaphthyridinyl, decahydro-1,8-naphthyridinyl, octahydropyrrolo[3,2-b]pyrrole, indolinyl, phthalimidyl, naphthalimidyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, 1H-benzo[e][1,4]diazepinyl, 1,4,5,7-tetrahydropyrano[3,4-b]pyrrolyl, 5,6-dihydro-4H-furo[3,2-b]pyrrolyl, 6,7-dihydro-5H-furo[3,2-b]pyranyl, 5,7-dihydro-4H-thieno[2,3-c]pyranyl, 2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 2,3-dihydro furo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrofuro[3,2-c]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothieno[3,2-b]pyridinyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1,6-naphthyridinyl, and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of heterocyclyl is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heterocyclyl”) or substituted (a “substituted heterocyclyl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is an unsubstituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is a substituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “aryl” refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10 or 14 π electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system (“C₆₋₁₄ aryl”). In some embodiments, an aryl group has 6 ring carbon atoms (“C₆ aryl”; e.g., phenyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has 10 ring carbon atoms (“C₁₀ aryl”; e.g., naphthyl such as 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has 14 ring carbon atoms (“C₁₄ aryl”; e.g., anthracyl). “Aryl” also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an aryl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted aryl”) or substituted (a “substituted aryl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is an unsubstituted C₆₋₁₄ aryl. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is a substituted C₆₋₁₄ aryl.

“Aralkyl” is a subset of “alkyl” and refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, substituted by an aryl group, as defined herein, wherein the point of attachment is on the alkyl moiety.

As used herein, alone or as part of another group, “heteroaryl” refers to a radical of a 5-14 membered monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic) aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10 or 14 π electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-14 membered heteroaryl”). In heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. Heteroaryl polycyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. “Heteroaryl” also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or on the heteroaryl ring, or wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocycyl or heterocycyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring. For polycyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl and the like) the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-10 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-8 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur (“5-6 membered heteroaryl”). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryls containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryls containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryls containing 3 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryls containing 4 heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryls containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryls containing 2 heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl and pyrazinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryls containing 3 or 4 heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively. Exemplary 7 membered heteroaryls containing 1 heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl and thiepinyl. Exemplary 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryls include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl. Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryls include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl and quinazolinyl. Exemplary tricyclic heteroaryls include, without limitation, phenanthridinyl, dibenzofuranyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl and phenazinyl. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently unsubstituted (an “unsubstituted heteroaryl”) or substituted (a “substituted heteroaryl”) with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents as described herein. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is an unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is a substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.

“Heteroaralkyl” is a subset of “alkyl” and refers to an alkyl group, as defined herein, substituted by a heteroaryl group, as defined herein, wherein the point of attachment is on the alkyl moiety.

As used herein, the term “partially unsaturated” refers to a ring moiety that includes at least one double or triple bond. The term “partially unsaturated” is intended to encompass rings having multiple sites of unsaturation, but is not intended to include aromatic groups (e.g., aryl or heteroaryl moieties) as herein defined.

Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted (e.g., “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkenyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” alkynyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” carbocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heterocyclyl, “substituted” or “unsubstituted” aryl or “substituted” or “unsubstituted” heteroaryl group). In general, the term “substituted”, whether preceded by the term “optionally” or not, means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom etc.) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction. Unless otherwise indicated, a “substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position.

Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen (i.e., fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I)), —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR^(aa), —ON(R^(bb))₂, —N(R^(bb))₂, —N(R^(bb))₃ ^(+X) ⁻, —N(OR^(cc))R^(bb), —SH, —SR^(aa), —SSR^(cc), —C(═O)R^(aa), —CO₂H, —CHO, —C(OR^(cc))₂, —CO₂R^(aa), —OC(═O)R^(aa), —OCO₂R^(aa), —C(═O)N(R^(bb))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(bb))₂, —NR^(bb)C(═O)R^(aa), —NR^(bb)CO₂R^(aa), —NR^(bb)C(═O)N(R^(bb))₂, —C(═NR^(bb))R^(aa), —C(═NR^(bb))OR^(aa), —OC(═NR^(bb))R^(aa), —OC(═NR^(bb))OR^(aa), —C(═NR^(bb))N(R^(bb))₂, —OC(═NR^(bb))N(R^(bb))₂, —NR^(bb)C(═NR^(bb))N(R^(bb))₂, —C(═O)NR^(bb)SO₂R^(aa), —NR^(bb)SO₂R^(aa), —SO₂N(R^(bb))₂, —SO₂R^(aa), —SO₂OR^(aa), —OSO₂R^(aa), —S(═O)R^(aa), —OS(═O)R^(aa), —Si(R^(aa))₃, —OSi(R^(aa))₃—C(═S)N(R^(bb))₂, —C(═O)SR^(aa), —C(═S)SR^(aa), —SC(S)SR^(aa), —P(═O)₂R^(aa), —OP(═O)₂R^(aa), —P(═O)(R^(aa))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(aa))₂, —OP(═O)(OR^(cc))₂, —P(═O)₂N(R^(bb))₂, —OP(═O)₂N(R^(bb))₂, —P(═O)(NR^(bb))₂, —OP(═O)(NR^(bb))₂, —NR^(bb)P(═O)(OR^(cc))₂, —NR^(bb)P(═O)(NR^(bb))₂, —P(R^(cc))₂, —P(R^(cc))₃, —OP(R^(cc))₂, —OP(R^(cc))₃, —B(OR^(cc))₂, —BR^(aa)(OR^(cc)), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₄ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(dd) groups;

or two geminal hydrogens on a carbon atom are replaced with the group ═O, ═S, ═NN(R^(bb))₂, ═NNR^(bb)C(═O)R^(aa), ═NNR^(bb)C(═O)OR^(aa), ═NNR^(bb)S(═O)₂R^(aa), ═NR^(bb), ═NOR^(cc);

each instance of R^(aa) is, independently, selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(dd) groups;

each instance of R^(bb) is, independently, selected from hydrogen, —OH, —OR^(aa), —N(R^(cc))₂, —CN, —C(═O)R^(aa), —C(═O)N(R^(cc))₂, —CO₂R^(aa), —SO₂R^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))OR^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))N(R^(cc))₂, —SO₂N(R^(cc))₂, —SO₂R^(cc), —SO₂OR^(cc), —SOR^(aa), —C(═S)N(R^(cc))₂, —C(═O)SR^(cc), —C(═S)SR^(cc), —P(═O)₂R^(aa), —P(═O)(R^(aa))₂, —P(═O)₂N(R^(cc))₂, —P(═O)(NR^(cc))₂, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(cc) groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(dd) groups;

each instance of R^(cc) is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(cc) groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(dd) groups;

each instance of R^(dd) is, independently, selected from halogen, —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR^(ee), —ON(R^(aa))₂, —N(R^(ff))₂, —N(R^(ff))₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR^(ee))R^(ff), —SH, —SR^(ee), —SSR^(ee), —C(═O)R^(ee), —CO₂H, —CO₂R^(ee), —OC(═O)R^(ee), —OCO₂R^(ee), —C(═O)N(R)₂, —OC(═O)N(R)₂, —NR^(ff)C(═O)R^(ee), —N^(ff)CO₂R^(ee), —NR^(ff)C(═O)N(R^(ff))₂, —C(═NR)OR^(ee), —OC(═NR^(ff))R^(ee), —OC(═NR)OR^(ee), —C(═NR^(ff))N(R^(ff))₂, —OC(═NR^(ff))N(R^(ff))₂, —NR^(ff)C(═NR)N(R^(ff))₂, —NR^(ff)SO₂R^(ee), —SO₂N(R^(ff))₂, —SO₂R^(ee), —SO₂OR^(ee), —OSO₂R^(ee), —S(═O)R^(ee), —Si(R^(ee))₃, —OSi(R^(ee))₃, —C(═S)N(R^(ff))₂, —C(═O)SR^(ee), —C(═S)SR^(ee), —SC(═S)SR^(ee), —P(═O)₂R^(ee), —P(═O)(R^(ee))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(ee))₂, —OP(═O)(OR^(ee))₂, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(gg) groups, or two geminal R^(dd) substituents can be joined to form ═O or ═S;

each instance of R^(ee) is, independently, selected from C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(gg) groups;

each instance of R^(ff) is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(ff) groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(gg) groups; and

each instance of R^(gg) is, independently, halogen, —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —ON(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃X, —NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂X, —NH₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl)X, —NH₃X, —N(OC₁₋₆ alkyl)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —N(OH)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NH(OH), —SH, —SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —SS(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —CO₂H, —CO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OCO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═O)NH₂, —C(═O)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OC(═O)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)C(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHCO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —NHC(═O)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)NH₂, —C(═NH)O(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═NH)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═NH)OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —C(═NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —C(═NH)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═NH)NH₂, —OC(═NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OC(NH)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(NH)NH₂, —NHC(NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —NHC(═NH)NH₂, —NHSO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —SO₂N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —SO₂NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —SO₂NH₂, —SO₂C₁₋₆ alkyl, —SO₂OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —OSO₂C₁₋₆ alkyl, —SOC₁₋₆ alkyl, —Si(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃, —OSi(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃-C(═S)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, C(═S)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), C(═S)NH₂, —C(═O)S(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═S)SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —SC(═S)SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —P(═O)₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —P(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OP(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OP(═O)(OC₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or two geminal R^(gg) substituents can be joined to form ═O or ═S;

wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

As used herein, a “counterion” is a negatively charged group associated with a positively charged quaternary amine in order to maintain electronic neutrality. Exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F, Cl⁻, Br⁻, I⁻), NO₃ ⁻, ClO₄ ⁻, OH⁻, H₂PO₄ ⁻, HSO₄ ⁻, sulfonate ions (e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, 10-camphor sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid-5-sulfonate, ethan-1-sulfonic acid-2-sulfonate, and the like) and carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate, ethanoate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, and the like).

Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary and quarternary nitrogen atoms. Exemplary nitrogen atom substitutents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, —OH, —OR^(aa), —N(R^(cc))₂, —CN, —C(═O)R^(aa), —C(═O)N(R^(cc))₂, —CO₂R^(aa), —SO₂R^(aa), —C(═NR^(bb))R^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))OR^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))N(R^(cc))₂, —SO₂N(R^(cc))₂, —SO₂R^(cc), —SO₂OR^(cc), —SOR^(aa), —C(═S)N(R^(cc))₂, —C(═O)SR^(cc), —C(═S)SR^(cc), —P(═O)₂R^(cc), —P(═O)(R^(aa))₂, —P(═O)₂N(R^(cc))₂, —P(═O)(NR^(cc))₂, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(cc) groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(dd) groups, and wherein R^(aa), R^(bb), R^(cc) and R^(dd) are as defined above.

In certain embodiments, the substituent present on the nitrogen atom is an amino protecting group. Amino protecting groups include, but are not limited to, —OH, —OR^(aa), —N(R^(cc))₂, —C(═O)R^(aa), —C(═O)N(R^(cc))₂, —CO₂R^(aa), —SO₂R^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))R^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))R^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))OR^(aa), —C(═NR^(cc))N(R^(cc))₂, —SO₂N(R^(cc))₂, —SO₂R^(cc), —SO₂OR^(cc), —SOR^(aa), —C(═S)N(R^(cc))₂, —C(═O)SR^(cc), —C(═S)SR^(cc), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl (e.g., aralkyl groups), C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(dd) groups, and wherein R^(aa), R^(bb), R^(cc) and R^(dd) are as defined above. Amino protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, ^(3rd) edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.

For example, amino protecting groups such as amide groups (e.g., —C(═O)R^(aa)) include, but are not limited to, formamide, acetamide, chloroacetamide, trichloroacetamide, trifluoroacetamide, phenylacetamide, 3-phenylpropanamide, picolinamide, 3-pyridylcarboxamide, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, benzamide, p-phenylbenzamide, o-nitophenylacetamide, o-nitrophenoxyacetamide, acetoacetamide, (N′-dithiobenzyloxycarbonylamino)acetamide, 3-(p-hydroxyphenyl)propanamide, 3-(o-nitrophenyl)propanamide, 2-methyl-2-(o-nitrophenoxy)propanamide, 2-methyl-2-(o-phenylazophenoxy)propanamide, 4-chlorobutanamide, 3-methyl-3-nitrobutanamide, o-nitro cinnamide, N-acetylmethionine derivative, o-nitrobenzamide and o-(benzoyloxymethyl)benzamide.

Amino protecting groups such as carbamate groups (e.g., —C(═O)OR^(aa)) include, but are not limited to, methyl carbamate, ethyl carbamante, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), 9-(2-sulfo)fluorenylmethyl carbamate, 9-(2,7-dibromo)fluoroenylmethyl carbamate, 2,7-di-t-butyl-[9-(10,10-dioxo-10,10,10,10-tetrahydrothioxanthyl)]methyl carbamate (DBD-Tmo c), 4-methoxyphenacyl carbamate (Phenoc), 2,2,2-trichloro ethyl carbamate (Troc), 2-trimethylsilylethyl carbamate (Teoc), 2-phenylethyl carbamate (hZ), 1-(1-adamantyl)-1-methylethyl carbamate (Adpoc), 1,1-dimethyl-2-haloethyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethyl-2,2-dibromoethyl carbamate (DB-t-BOC), 1,1-dimethyl-2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate (TCBOC), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethyl carbamate (Bpoc), 1-(3,5-di-t-butylphenyl)-1-methylethyl carbamate (t-Bumeoc), 2-(2′- and 4′-pyridyl)ethyl carbamate (Pyoc), 2-(N,N-dicyclohexylcarboxamido)ethyl carbamate, t-butyl carbamate (BOC), 1-adamantyl carbamate (Adoc), vinyl carbamate (Voc), allyl carbamate (Alloc), 1-isopropylallyl carbamate (Ipaoc), cinnamyl carbamate (Coc), 4-nitrocinnamyl carbamate (Noc), 8-quinolyl carbamate, N-hydroxypiperidinyl carbamate, alkyldithio carbamate, benzyl carbamate (Cbz), p-methoxybenzyl carbamate (Moz), p-nitobenzyl carbamate, p-bromobenzyl carbamate, p-chlorobenzyl carbamate, 2,4-dichlorobenzyl carbamate, 4-methylsulfinylbenzyl carbamate (Msz), 9-anthrylmethyl carbamate, diphenylmethyl carbamate, 2-methylthioethyl carbamate, 2-methylsulfonylethyl carbamate, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl carbamate, [2-(1,3-dithianyl)]methyl carbamate (Dmoc), 4-methylthiophenyl carbamate (Mtpc), 2,4-dimethylthiophenyl carbamate (Bmpc), 2-phosphonio ethyl carbamate (Peoc), 2-triphenylphosphonioisopropyl carbamate (Ppoc), 1,1-dimethyl-2-cyanoethyl carbamate, m-chloro-p-acyloxyb enzyl carbamate, p-(dihydroxyboryl)benzyl carbamate, 5-benzisoxazolylmethyl carbamate, 2-(trifluoromethyl)-6-chromonylmethyl carbamate (Tcroc), m-nitrophenyl carbamate, 3,5-dimethoxybenzyl carbamate, o-nitrobenzyl carbamate, 3,4-dimethoxy-6-nitrobenzyl carbamate, phenyl(o-nitrophenyl)methyl carbamate, t-amyl carbamate, S-benzyl thiocarbamate, p-cyanobenzyl carbamate, cyclobutyl carbamate, cyclohexyl carbamate, cyclopentyl carbamate, cyclopropylmethyl carbamate, p-decyloxybenzyl carbamate, 2,2-dimethoxycarbonylvinyl carbamate, o-(N,N-dimethylcarboxamido)benzyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethyl-3-(N,N-dimethylcarboxamido)propyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethylpropynyl carbamate, di(2-pyridyl)methyl carbamate, 2-furanylmethyl carbamate, 2-iodoethyl carbamate, isoborynl carbamate, isobutyl carbamate, isonicotinyl carbamate, p-(p′-methoxyphenylazo)benzyl carbamate, 1-methylcyclobutyl carbamate, 1-methylcyclohexyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-cyclopropylmethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-(p-phenylazophenyl)ethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl carbamate, 1-methyl-1-(4-pyridyl)ethyl carbamate, phenyl carbamate, p-(phenylazo)benzyl carbamate, 2,4,6-tri-t-butylphenyl carbamate, 4-(trimethylammonium)benzyl carbamate, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl carbamate.

Amino protecting groups such as sulfonamide groups (e.g., —S(═O)₂R^(aa)) include, but are not limited to, p-toluenesulfonamide (Ts), benzenesulfonamide, 2,3,6,-trimethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtr), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtb), 2,6-dimethyl-4-methoxybenzene sulfonamide (Pme), 2,3,5,6-tetramethyl-4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mte), 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mbs), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonamide (Mts), 2,6-dimethoxy-4-methylbenzenesulfonamide (iMds), 2,2,5,7,8-p entamethylchroman-6-sulfonamide (Pmc), methanesulfonamide (Ms), β-trimethylsilylethanesulfonamide (SES), 9-anthracenesulfonamide, 4-(4′,8′-dimethoxynaphthylmethyl)benzenesulfonamide (DNMBS), benzylsulfonamide, trifluoromethylsulfonamide, and phenacylsulfonamide.

Other amino protecting groups include, but are not limited to, phenothiazinyl-(10)-carbonyl derivative, N′-p-toluenesulfonylamino carbonyl derivative, N′-phenylaminothiocarbonyl derivative, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, N-acetylmethionine derivative, 4,5-diphenyl-3-oxazolin-2-one, N-phthalimide, N-dithiasuccinimide (Dts), N-2,3-diphenylmaleimide, N-2,5-dimethylpyrrole, N-1,1,4,4-tetramethyldisilylazacyclopentane adduct (STABASE), 5-substituted 1,3-dimethyl-1,3,5-triazacyclohexan-2-one, 5-substituted 1,3-dibenzyl-1,3,5-triazacyclohexan-2-one, 1-substituted 3,5-dinitro-4-pyridone, N-methylamine, N-allylamine, N-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methylamine (SEM), N-3-acetoxypropylamine, N-(1-isopropyl-4-nitro-2-oxo-3-pyroolin-3-yl)amine, quaternary ammonium salts, N-benzylamine, N-di(4-methoxyphenyl)methylamine, N-5-dibenzosuberylamine, N-triphenylmethylamine (Tr), N-[(4-methoxyphenyl)diphenylmethyl]amine (MMTr), N-9-phenylfluorenylamine (PhF), N-2,7-dichloro-9-fluorenylmethyleneamine, N-ferrocenylmethylamino (Fcm), N-2-picolylamino N′-oxide, N-1,1-dimethylthiomethyleneamine, N-benzylideneamine, N-p-methoxybenzylideneamine, N-diphenylmethylene amine, N-[(2-pyridyl)mesityl]methyleneamine, N—(N′,N′-dimethylaminomethylene)amine, N,N′-isopropylidenediamine, N-p-nitrobenzylideneamine, N-salicylideneamine, N-5-chloro salicylideneamine, N-(5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl)phenylmethyleneamine, N-cyclohexylideneamine, N-(5,5-dimethyl-3-oxo-1-cyclohexenyl)amine, N-borane derivative, N-diphenylborinic acid derivative, N-[phenyl(pentacarbonylchromium- or tungsten)carbonyl]amine, N-copper chelate, N-zinc chelate, N-nitroamine, N-nitrosoamine, amine N-oxide, diphenylphosphinamide (Dpp), dimethylthiophosphinamide (Mpt), diphenylthiophosphinamide (Ppt), dialkyl phosphoramidates, dibenzyl phosphoramidate, diphenyl phosphoramidate, benzenesulfenamide, o-nitrobenzenesulfenamide (Nps), 2,4-dinitrobenzenesulfenamide, pentachlorobenzenesulfenamide, 2-nitro-4-methoxybenzenesulfenamide, triphenylmethylsulfenamide and 3-nitropyridinesulfenamide (Npys).

As used herein, a “leaving group” is an art-understood term referring to a molecular fragment that departs with a pair of electrons in heterolytic bond cleavage, wherein the molecular fragment is an anion or neutral molecule. See, for example, Smith, March Advanced Organic Chemistry 6th ed. (501-502).

These and other exemplary substituents are described in more detail in the Detailed Description, the Exemplification and in the claims. The invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the above exemplary listing of substituents.

As used herein, a “pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof” includes pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, prodrugs, tautomers, isomers, and/or polymorphs of a compound of the present invention, as defined below and herein.

As used herein, the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to those salts which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like, and are commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, S. M. Berge et al., describe pharmaceutically acceptable salts in detail in J. Pharmaceutical Sciences, 1977, 66, 1-19. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the compounds of this invention include those derived from suitable inorganic and organic acids and bases. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable, nontoxic acid addition salts are salts of an amino group formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid and perchloric acid or with organic acids such as acetic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, succinic acid or malonic acid or by using other methods used in the art such as ion exchange. Other pharmaceutically acceptable salts include adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, formate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, gluconate, hemisulfate, heptanoate, hexanoate, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, p-toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts, and the like. Salts derived from appropriate bases include alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammonium and N⁺(C₁₋₄alkyl)₄ salts. Representative alkali or alkaline earth metal salts include sodium, lithium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and the like. Further pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, when appropriate, nontoxic ammonium, quaternary ammonium, and amine cations formed using counterions such as halide, hydroxide, carboxylate, sulfate, phosphate, nitrate, lower alkyl sulfonate and aryl sulfonate.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof is an isomer. As used herein, the term “isomer” includes any and all geometric isomers and stereoisomers. For example, “isomers” include cis- and trans-isomers, E- and Z- isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof is a tautomer. As used herein, the term “tautomer” includes two or more interconvertable compounds resulting from at least one formal migration of a hydrogen atom and at least one change in valency (e.g., a single bond to a double bond, a triple bond to a single bond, or vice versa). The exact ratio of the tautomers depends on several factors, including temperature, solvent, and pH. Tautomerizations (i.e., the reaction providing a tautomeric pair) may catalyzed by acid or base. Exemplary tautomerizations include keto-to-enol; amide-to-imide; lactam-to-lactim; enamine-to-imine; and enamine-to-(a different) enamine tautomerizations.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof is a hydrate or solvate. As used herein, the term “hydrate” refers to a compound non-covalently associated with one or more molecules of water. Likewise, “solvate” refers to a compound non-covalently associated with one or more molecules of an organic solvent.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof is a prodrug. As used herein, the term “prodrug” refers to a derivative of a parent compound that requires transformation within the body in order to release the parent compound. In certain cases, a prodrug has improved physical and/or delivery properties over the parent compound. Prodrugs are typically designed to enhance pharmaceutically and/or pharmacokinetically based properties associated with the parent compound. The advantage of a prodrug can lie in its physical properties, such as enhanced water solubility for parenteral administration at physiological pH compared to the parent compound, or it enhances absorption from the digestive tract, or it may enhance drug stability for long-term storage.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof is a polymorph. As used herein, “polymorph” refers to a compound having more than one crystal structure, e.g., resulting from differences in molecular packing and/or molecular conformation of the compound in the solid state.

SEQUENCE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

SEQ. ID. NO.: Homo sapiens FAAH amino acid sequence: MVQYELWAALPGASGVALACCFVAAAVALRWSGRRTARGAVVRARQRQRA GLENMDRAAQRFRLQNPDLDSEALLALPLPQLVQKLHSRELAPEAVLFTY VGKAWEVNKGTNCVTSYLADCETQLSQAPRQGLLYGVPVSLKECFTYKGQ DSTLGLSLNEGVPAECDSVVVHVLKLQGAVPFVHTNVPQSMFSYDCSNPL FGQTVNPWKSSKSPGGSSGGEGALIGSGGSPLGLGTDIGGSIRFPSSFCG ICGLKPTGNRLSKSGLKGCVYGQEAVRLSVGPMARDVESLALCLRALLCE DMFRLDPTVPPLPFREEVYTSSQPLRVGYYETDNYTMPSPAMRRAVLETK QSLEAAGHTLVPFLPSNIPHALETLSTGGLFSDGGHTFLQNFKGDFVDPC LGDLVSILKLPQWLKGLLAFLVKPLLPRLSAFLSNMKSRSAGKLWELQHE IEVYRKTVIAQWRALDLDVVLTPMLAPALDLNAPGRATGAVSYTMLYNCL DFPAGVVPVTTVTAEDEAQMEHYRGYFGDIWDKMLQKGMKKSVGLPVAVQ CVALPWQEELCLRFMREVERLMTPEKQSS

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

-   -   I. Compounds

The present invention provides isoxazoline FAAH inhibitor compounds of the formula (I):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof,

wherein:

each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from —H, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, R^(d) is the group -L-Z, and Z is selected from C₆₋₁₄ aryl;

L is a covalent bond or a divalent C₁ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms;

G is selected from —CN, —NO₂, —S(═O)R^(e), —SO₂R^(e), —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂R^(e), —PO₂OR^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)R^(e), —(C═O)OR^(e), —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —Br, —I, —F, —Cl, —OR^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —SR^(e), —OSO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —OPO₂R^(e), —OPO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))OR^(e), —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion; and

each R^(e) is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl and 5-14 membered heteroaryl; each R^(f) attached to a nitrogen atom is, independently, selected from —H, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, or an amino protecting group; or R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring or an 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring.

Group G

As defined above, G is selected from —CN, —NO₂, —S(═O)R^(e), —SO₂R^(e), —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂R^(e), —PO₂OR^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)R^(e), —(C═O)OR^(e), —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —Br, —I, —F, —Cl, —OR^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —SR^(e), —OSO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —OPO₂R^(e), —OPO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NOOR^(e), —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion;

and wherein R^(e) is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl and 5-14 membered heteroaryl; each R^(f) attached to a nitrogen atom is, independently, selected from —H, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, or an amino protecting group; or R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring or an 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring.

In certain embodiments, G is not a leaving group, e.g., for example, G is selected from —F, —CN, —NO₂, —S(═O)R^(e), —SO₂R^(e), —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂R^(e), —PO₂OR^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)R^(e), —(C═O)OR^(e), and —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e).

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —CN and —NO₂. In certain embodiments, G is —CN. In certain embodiments, G is —NO₂.

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —S(═O)R^(e), —SO₂R^(e), and —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —S(═O)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —SO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e).

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —PO₂R^(e), —PO₂OR^(e) and —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —PO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —PO₂OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e).

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —(C═O)R^(e), —(C═O)OR^(e) and —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —(C═O)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —(C═O)OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e).

However, in certain embodiments, G is a leaving group, e.g., for example, G is selected from —Cl, —Br, —I, —OR^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —SR^(e), —OSO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —OPO₂R^(e), —OPO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))OR^(e), and —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

In certain embodiments, G is a halogen; i.e., selected from —F, —Cl, —Br and —I. In certain embodiments, G is —F. In certain embodiments, G is —Br. In certain embodiments, G is —I. In certain embodiments, G is —Cl. However, in certain embodiments, G is not a halogen. For example, in certain embodiments, G is not —Br. In certain embodiments, G is not —I. In certain embodiments, G is not —F. In certain embodiments, G is not —Cl.

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —OR^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OSO₂R^(e), —OPO₂R^(e), —OPO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e) and —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is selected from —OR^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e) and —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is selected from −ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e) and —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —ONR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —OSO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —OPO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —OPO₂OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —O(C═O)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —O(C═O)OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e).

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —OR^(e) and —SR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is selected from —OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —SR^(e).

In certain embodiments, G is selected from —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))OR^(e) and —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion. In certain embodiments, G is selected from —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e) and —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is selected from —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e) and —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

Additional embodiments of G, included in the description of groups R^(e) and R^(f), and further exemplified in the Tables and Examples, is provided below and herein.

R^(e) of Group G

As defined generally above, in certain embodiments, wherein G is selected from —S(═O)R^(e), —SO₂R^(e), —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂R^(e), —PO₂OR^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)R^(e), —(C═O)OR^(e), —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —OR^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —SR^(e), —OSO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —OPO₂R^(e), —OPO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)R^(e), —O(C═O)OR^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))OR^(e), and —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion, R^(e) is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl and 5-14 membered heteroaryl.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein the alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocycyl, aryl, heterocyclyl, and heteroaryl groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups, as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₁₋₁₀ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₁₋₅ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₅ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₄ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₃ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₂ alkyl substituted with 0, 1 or 2 R^(h) groups. Exemplary alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl, tent-butyl, pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, and hexyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₅ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₂ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₃ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₋₂ perhaloalkyl. Exemplary R^(e) perhaloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, —CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₂CF₃, —CCl₃, —CFCl₂, and —CF₂Cl.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₆ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₂₋₆ alkenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₂₋₅ alkenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₂₋₃ alkenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, or 3 R^(h) groups. Exemplary alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethenyl, 1-propenyl, 2-propenyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, butadienyl, pentenyl, pentadienyl and hexenyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₆ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₆ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₅ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₄ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₂₋₃ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. Exemplary R^(e) alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 2-propynyl, 1-butynyl, 2-butynyl, pentynyl and hexynyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

However, in certain embodiments, wherein G is —OR^(e), then R^(e) is not C₁₋₆ alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, aralkyl). In certain embodiments, wherein G is —OR^(e), then R^(e) is not C₂₋₆ alkenyl (e.g., allyl).

In certain embodiments, wherein G is —SR^(e), then R^(e) is not then R^(e) is not C₁₋₆ alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, aralkyl).

In certain embodiments, wherein G is —NR^(e)R^(f) and R^(f) is —H or C₁₋₃ alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, aralkyl) then R^(e) is not C₁₋₆ alkyl.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₆₋₁₄ aryl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₆₋₁₀ aryl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₆₋₁₀ aryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is C₆ aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₁₀ aryl (e.g., naphthyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with 0, 1 or 2 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with 0 or 1 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 2 R^(h) groups). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 1 R^(h) group). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 0 R^(h) groups).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with at least one ortho R^(h) group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with at least one meta R^(h) group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is phenyl substituted with at least one para R^(h) group.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a phenyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1. In certain embodiments, x is 3. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted phenyl group (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted phenyl group (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted phenyl group (i.e., wherein x is 0).

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a naphthyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a naphthyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein x is 0).

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 1-naphthyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 2-naphthyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

However, in certain embodiments, wherein G is —OR^(e), then R^(e) is not C₁₀ aryl (e.g., 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-10 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-8 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-6 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 9-10 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

Exemplary R^(e) heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, tetrazolyl, pyridinyl (e.g., 2-pyridinyl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl), pyridazinyl (e.g., 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl), pyrimidinyl (e.g. 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl), pyrazinyl, triazinyl, tetrazinyl, azepinyl, oxepinyl, thiepinyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, phenanthridinyl, dibenzofuranyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl and phenazinyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-membered heteroaryl selected pyrrolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl and tetrazolyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups.

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-membered heteroaryl of the formula:

wherein Y^(a), Y^(b), Y^(c) and Y^(d) are, independently, selected from CH, CR^(h), O, S, N, or NR^(k), with the proviso that at least one of Y^(a), Y^(b), Y^(c) and Y^(d) is O, S, N or NR^(k), and wherein R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments of the above formula (i-d), Y^(a) is O, S, N, or NR^(k) and Y^(b), Y^(c) and Y^(d) are, independently, selected from CH, CR^(h), NR^(k) or N. In certain embodiments of the above formula (i-d), Y^(a) is O, S, N, or NR^(k) and Y^(b), Y^(c) and Y^(d) are, independently, selected from CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments of the above formula (i-d), Y^(a) is O, S, or NR^(k), Y^(c) is N and Y^(b) and Y^(d) are, independently, selected from CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments of the above formula (i-d), Y^(b) is O, S, or NR^(k) and Y^(a), Y^(c) and Y^(d) are, independently, selected from CH, CR^(h) or N. In certain embodiments of the above formula (i-d), Y^(b) is O, S, or NR^(k) and Y^(a), Y^(c) and Y^(d) are, independently, selected from CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments of the above formula (i-d), Y^(b) is O, S, or or NR^(k), Y^(d) is N and Y^(a) and Y^(c) are, independently, selected from CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl of any one of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1 or 2, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted 5-membered heteroaryl (e.g., wherein x is 1 or 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted 5-membered heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

However, in certain embodiments, wherein G is —OR^(e), R^(e) is not thiazolyl, e.g., of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1 or 2, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heteroaryl selected from the group consisting of pyridinyl (e.g., 2-pyridinyl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl), pyridazinyl (e.g., 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl), pyrimidinyl (e.g. 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl), pyrazinyl, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups.

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heteroaryl group of the formula:

wherein W^(a), W^(b), W^(c), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, selected from CH, CR^(h) or N, with the proviso that at least one of W^(a), W^(b), W^(c), W^(d) and W^(e) is N, and wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrindinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrindinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrindinyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted pyrindinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted pyrindinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3 or 4). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted pyrindinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted pyrindinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted pyrindinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 2-pyrindinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(a) is N and W^(b), W^(c), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments R^(e) is a 3-pyrindinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(b) is N and W^(a), W^(c), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments R^(e) is a 4-pyrindinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(c) is N and W^(a), W^(b), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 2-pyridinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 3-pyridinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 4-pyridinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyridazinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyridazinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyridazinyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted pyridazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted pyridazinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2 or 3). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted pyridazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted pyridazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted pyridazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 3-pyridazinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(a) and W^(b) are N and W^(c), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments R^(e) is a 4-pyridazinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(b) and W^(c) are N and W^(a), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 3-pyridazinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 4-pyridazinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrimidinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrimidinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrimidinyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted pyrimidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted pyrimidinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2 or 3). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted pyrimidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted pyridazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted pyrimidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 2-pyrimidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(a) and W^(e) are N and W^(b), W^(c) and W^(d) are, independently, CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments R^(e) is a 4-pyrimidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(a) and W^(c) are N and W^(b), W^(d) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments R^(e) is a 5-pyrimidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-e) wherein W^(b) and W^(d) are N and W^(a), W^(c) and W^(e) are, independently, CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 2-pyrimidinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 4-pyrimidinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted 5-pyrimidinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrazinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrazinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a pyrazinyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted pyrazinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2 or 3). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted pyrazinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments R^(e) is a triazinyl group. In certain embodiments R^(e) is a triazinyl group substituted with 0, 1 or 2 R^(h) groups. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a triazinyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1 or 2, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted pyrazinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1 or 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted triazinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments R^(e) is a tetrazinyl group. In certain embodiments R^(e) is a tetrazinyl group substituted with 0 or 1 R^(h) groups. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a tetrazinyl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0 or 1, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted pyrazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted pyrazinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted or unsubstituted tetrazinyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 9-membered heteroaryl (e.g., a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl selected from indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl of the formula:

wherein Y^(e), Y^(f), Y^(g), Y^(i), Y^(j), Y^(k) and Y^(m) are, independently, C, CH, CR^(h), O, S, N, or NR^(k) and V is C or N, with the proviso that at least one of Y^(e), Y^(f), Y^(g) is selected from O, S, N or NR^(k) wherein R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl group of the formula (i-f), wherein Y^(e) is selected from O, S, or NR^(k), Y^(n) is C, and Y^(f), Y^(g), Y^(i), Y^(j), Y^(k) and Y^(m) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl wherein Y^(e) is selected from O, S, or NR^(k); Y^(g) is N; V is C; Y^(f) is C, CH, or CR^(h) or N, and Y^(i), Y^(j), Y^(k) and Y^(m) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl wherein Y^(e) is NR^(k), S or O; Y^(m) is N; Y^(n) is C; and Y^(f), Y^(g), Y^(i), Y^(j), and Y^(k) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl wherein yg is O, S, or NR^(k); Y^(m) is N; V is C; and Y^(e), Y^(f), Y^(i), Y^(j) and Y^(k) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl wherein Y^(e) is selected from N; V is N; and Y^(f), Y^(i), Y^(j), Y^(k) and Y^(m) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl group of the formula:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 and R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted 5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 10-membered heteroaryl (e.g., a 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl selected from naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl and quinazolinyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl of the formula:

wherein W^(f), W^(g), W^(h), W^(i), W^(j), W^(k), W^(m) and W^(n) are, independently, selected from C, CH, CR^(h) or N, with the proviso that at least one of W^(f), W^(g), W^(h), W^(i), W^(j), W^(k), W^(m) and W^(n) is N, and wherein R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a quinolinyl group; e.g., of the formula (i-g) wherein W^(i) is N and W^(g), W^(h), W^(f), W^(j), W^(k), W^(m) and W^(n) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a quinolinyl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted quinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted quinolinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted quinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted quinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted quinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an isoquinolinyl group; e.g., of the formula (i-g) wherein W^(h) is N and W^(f), W^(g), W^(i), W^(j), W^(k), W^(m) and W^(n) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is an isoquinolinyl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted isoquinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted isoquinolinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted isoquinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted isoquinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted isoquinolinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a quinoxalinyl group; e.g., of the formula (i-g) wherein W^(f) and W^(i) are N and W^(g), W^(h), W^(j), W^(k), W^(m) and W^(n) are, independently, C, CH, or CR^(h). For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a quinoxalinyl group of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted quinoxalinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted quinoxalinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted quinoxalinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted quinoxalinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted quinoxalinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-10 membered heterocyclyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-8 membered heterocyclyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 5-6 membered heterocyclyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 9-10 membered heterocyclyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

Exemplary heterocyclyl R^(e) groups include, but are not limited to, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl, az etidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl, pyrrolyl-2,5-dione, dioxolanyl, oxathiolanyl, dithiolanyl, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, thiadiazolinyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, thianyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl, triazinanyl, azepanyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, azocanyl, oxecanyl, thiocanyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, tetrahydrobenzothienyl, tetrahydrobenzofuranyl, tetrahydroindolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, decahydroisoquinolinyl, octahydrochromenyl, octahydroisochromenyl, decahydronaphthyridinyl, decahydro-1,8-naphthyridinyl, octahydropyrrolo[3,2-b]pyrrole, indolinyl, phthalimidyl, naphthalimidyl, chromanyl, chromenyl, 1H-benzo[e][1,4]diazepinyl, 1,4,5,7-tetrahydro-pyrano[3,4-b]pyrrolyl, 5,6-dihydro-4H-furo[3,2-b]pyrro lyl, 6,7-dihydro-5H-furo[3,2-b]pyranyl, 5,7-dihydro-4H-thieno[2,3-c]pyranyl, 2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 2,3-dihydrofuro[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridinyl, 4,5,6,7-tetra-hydro furo[3,2-c]pyridinyl, and 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrothieno[3,2-b]pyridinyl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-1,6-naphthyridinyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heterocyclyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heterocyclyl selected from piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, thianyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl, and triazinanyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 6-membered heterocyclyl of the formula:

wherein W^(o), W^(p), W^(q), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, selected from CH₂, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂, NR^(k), O or S, and W^(t) is N, CH, CR^(h), with the proviso that at least one of W^(o), W^(p), W^(q), W^(r) and W^(s) is selected from N, NR^(k), O or S, and wherein R^(h) and R^(k) are defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a piperidinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a piperidinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups, e.g., of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted piperidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted piperidinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted piperidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted piperidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted piperidinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 1-piperidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(t) is N and W^(o), W^(p), W^(q), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, selected from CH₂, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 2-piperidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(o) is NR^(k); W^(p), W^(q), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂, or CH₂; and W^(t) is CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 3-piperidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(p) is NR^(k); W^(o), W^(q) W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂, or CH₂; and W^(t) is CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 4-piperidinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(q) is NR^(k); W^(o), W^(p), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂, or CH₂; and W^(t) is CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a piperazinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a piperazinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups, e.g., of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted piperazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted piperazinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted piperazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted piperazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted piperazinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 1-piperazinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(t) is N, W^(q) is NR^(k) and W^(o), W^(p), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, selected from CH₂, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a 2-piperazinyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(o) and W^(r) are independently NR^(k) and W^(p), W^(q), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂, or CH₂; and W^(t) is CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a morpholinyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a morpholinyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups, e.g., of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted morpholinyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted morpholinyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted morpholinyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted morpholinyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted morpholinyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a morpholinyl group of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(t) is N, W^(q) is O and W^(o), W^(p), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, selected from CH₂, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a dioxanyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a dioxanyl group substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups, e.g., of the formulae:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is an unsubstituted dioxanyl (i.e., wherein x is 0). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a substituted dioxanyl (e.g., wherein x is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a monosubstituted dioxanyl (i.e., wherein x is 1). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a disubstituted dioxanyl (i.e., wherein x is 2). In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a trisubstituted dioxanyl (i.e., wherein x is 3). In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, x is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, x is 0 or 1.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a dioxanyl group, e.g., of the formula (i-h) wherein W^(o) and W^(r) are O and W^(p), W^(q), W^(r), and W^(s) are, independently, CHR^(h), C(R^(h))₂, or CH₂; and W^(t) is CH or CR^(h).

Other 6-membered heterocycyl R^(e) groups encompassed by formula (i-h) include monosaccharide sugars, e.g., for example, pyranosides selected from ribose, arabinose, xylose, lyxose, allose, altrose, glucose, mannose, gulose, iodose, galactose and talose.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C3-10 carbocycyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C5-8 carbocycyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C5-6 carbocycyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) is a C9-10 carbocycyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups.

Exemplary R^(e) C₃₋₁₀ carbocycyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, cycloheptyl, and cycloheptadienyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups.

R^(f) of Group G

As defined generally above, in certain embodiments, wherein G is selected from —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —ONR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —ONR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —NR^(f)SO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂R^(e), —NR^(f)PO₂OR^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═O)OR^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NOOR^(e), and—[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion, each R^(f) attached to a nitrogen atom is, independently, selected from —H or C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, or an amino protecting group, or R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring or an 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring.

In certain embodiments, R^(f) is H or a C₁₋₁₀ alkyl group.

In certain embodiments, R^(f) is H.

In certain embodiments, R^(f) is a C₁₋₁₀ alkyl group. In certain embodiments, R^(f) is C₁₋₁₀ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. Exemplary R^(f) alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, allyl, and benzyl. In certain embodiments, R^(f) an unsubstituted methyl, i.e., —CH₃. In certain embodiments, R^(f) an unsubstituted ethyl, i.e., —CH₂CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(f) is an amino protecting group. For example, in certain embodiments, R^(f) is selected from —OH, —OR^(i), —N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)R^(i), —C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —CO₂R^(i), —SO₂R^(i), —C(═NR^(k))R^(i), —C(═NR^(k))OR^(j), —C(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂R^(i), —SO₂OR^(i), —SOR^(i), —C(═S)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)SR^(i), —C(═S)SR^(i), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl (e.g., aralkyl), C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups, wherein R^(i), R^(k), R^(m) are as defined below and herein.

However, in certain embodiments, G is —NR^(e)R^(f) and R^(f) is —H or C₁₋₃ alkyl, then R^(e) is not C₁₋₆ alkyl or thiazolyl.

Moreover, in certain embodiments, wherein G is —OC(═O)NR^(f)R^(e), then R^(e) and R^(f) are not both —CH₃.

Alternatively, in certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring or an 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring; e.g., for example, when G is —SO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —PO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —ONR^(f)R^(e), —OPO₂NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═O)NR^(f)R^(e), —NR^(f)(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), —O(C═NR^(f))NR^(f)R^(e), and —[N(R^(f))₂R^(e)]⁺X⁻ wherein X⁻ is a counterion. In certain embodiments, wherein R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring or an 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, the heterocyclyl ring or heteroaryl ring are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups, as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form an 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-10 membered heterocyclyl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-8 membered heterocyclyl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-6 membered heterocyclyl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 9-10 membered heterocyclyl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a heterocyclyl group selected from azirdinyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl, pyrrolyl-2,5-dione, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, thiadiazolinyl, piperidinyl, dihydropyridinyl, thianyl, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, triazinanyl, azepanyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, azocanyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, tetrahydrobenzo-thienyl, tetrahydroindolyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, decahydroisoquinolinyl, indolinyl, and phthalimidyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R^(h) groups.

For example, in certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-membered heterocyclyl ring selected from the group:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, wherein R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 6-membered heterocyclyl ring selected from the group:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, wherein R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein.

However, in certain embodiments, wherein G is —NR^(e)R^(f), then R^(e) and R^(f) are not joined to form a pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl or azepanyl ring.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-10 membered heteroaryl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-8 membered heteroaryl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-6 membered heteroaryl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(h) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 9-10 membered heteroaryl ring substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(h) groups.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-membered heteroaryl ring selected from:

wherein x is 0, 1 or 2, and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein.

However, in certain embodiments, wherein G is —NR^(f)R^(e), R^(e) and R^(f) are not joined to form a 1,2,4-triazolyl ring, e.g. of the formula:

wherein x is 0 or 1, and R^(h) is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 9-membered heteroaryl (“5,6-bicyclic heteroaryl”) ring selected from:

wherein x is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and R^(h) and R^(k) are as defined below and herein.

Group G Substituents

Embodiments of R^(h)

As used above and herein each instance of R^(h) is, independently, selected from halogen (fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I)), —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR^(i), —ON(R^(k))₂, —N(R^(k))₂, —N(R^(k))₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR)R^(k), —SH, —SR^(i), —SSRj, —C(═O)R^(i), —CO₂H, —CHO, —CO₂R^(i), —OC(═O)R^(i), —OCO₂R^(i), —C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —NR^(k)C(═O)R^(i), —NR^(k)CO₂R^(i), —NR^(k)C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═NR^(k))R^(i), —C(═NR^(k))OR^(i), —OC(═NR^(k))R^(i), —OC(═NR^(k))OR^(i), —C(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —OC(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —NR^(k)C(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), —NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), —SO₂N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂R^(i), —SO₂OR^(i), —OSO₂R^(i), —S(═O)R^(i), —OS(═O)R^(i), —Si(R^(i))₃, —OS^(i)(R^(i))₃—C(═S)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)SR^(i), —C(═S)SR^(i), —SC(S)SR^(i), —P(═O)₂R^(i), —OP(═O)₂R^(i), —P(═O)(R^(i))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(i))₂, —OP(═O)(OR)₂, —P(═O)₂N(R^(k))₂, —OP(═O)₂N(R^(k))₂, —P(═O)(NR^(k))₂, —OP(═O)(NR^(k))₂, —NR^(k)P(═O)(OR^(j))₂, —NR^(k)P(═O)(NR^(k))₂, —P(R)₂, —P(R)₃, —OP(R)₂, —OP(R)₃, —B(OR^(j))₂, —BR^(i)(OR^(j)), C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, C₃₋₁₄ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups;

each instance of R^(i) is, independently, selected from C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups;

each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from hydrogen, —OH, —OR^(i), —N(R)₂, —CN, —C(═O)R^(i), —C(═O)N(R^(j))₂, —CO₂R^(i), —SO₂R^(i), —C(═NR^(j))OR^(i), —C(═NR^(j))N(R^(j))₂, —SO₂N(R^(j))₂, —SO₂R^(j), —SO₂OR^(j), —SOR^(i), —C(═S)N(R^(j))₂, —C(═O)SR^(j), —C(═S)SR^(j), —P(═O)₂R^(i), —P(═O)(R^(i))₂, —P(═O)₂N(R^(j))₂, —P(═O)(NR^(j))₂, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₂₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(j) groups attached to an N atom are joined to foR^(m) a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups;

each instance of R^(j) is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(j) groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups;

each instance of R^(m) is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR^(o), —ON(R^(n))₂, —N(R^(n))₂, —N(R^(n))₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR^(o))R^(n), —SH, —SR^(o), —SSR^(o), —C(═O)R^(o), —CO₂H, —CO₂R^(o), —OC(═O)R^(o), —OCO₂R^(o), —C(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)C(═O)R^(o), —NR^(n)CO₂R^(o), —NR^(n)C(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —C(═NR^(n))OR^(o), —OC(═NR^(n))R^(o), —OC(═NR^(n))OR^(o), —C(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —OC(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)C(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)SO₂R^(o), —SO₂N(R^(n))₂, —SO₂R^(o), —SO₂OR^(o), —OSO₂R^(o), —S(═O)R^(o), —Si(R^(o))₃, —OSi(R^(o))₃, —C(═S)N(R^(n))₂, —C(═O)SR^(o), —C(═S)SR^(o), —SC(═S)SR^(o), —P(═O)₂R^(o), —P(═O)(R^(o))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(o))₂, —OP(═O)(OR^(o))₂, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(p) groups, or two geminal R^(m) substituents can be joined to form ═O or ═S;

each instance of R^(o) is, independently, selected from C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(p) groups;

each instance of R^(n) is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆-perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R^(n) groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(p) groups; and

each instance of R^(p) is, independently, fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —ON(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃X, —NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂X, —NH₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl)X, —NH₃X, —N(OC₁₋₆ alkyl)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —N(OH)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NH(OH), —SH, —SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —SS(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —CO₂H, —CO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OCO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═O)NH₂, —C(═O)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OC(═O)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)(C₁₋₆alkyl), —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)C(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHCO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —NHC(═O)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)NH₂, —C(═NH)O(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═NH)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═NH)OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —C(═NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —C(═NH)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═NH)NH₂, —OC(═NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OC(NH)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(NH)NH₂, —NHC(NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —NHC(═NH)NH₂, —NHSO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —SO₂N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —SO₂NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —SO₂NH₂, —SO₂C₁₋₁₆ alkyl, —SO₂OC₁₋₁₆ alkyl, —OSO₂C₁₋₆ alkyl, —SOC₁₋₆ alkyl, —Si(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃, —OSi(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃-C(═S)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, C(═S)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), C(═S)NH₂, —C(═O)S(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═S)SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —SC(═S)SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —P(═O)₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —P(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OP(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OP(═O)(OC₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, 5-14 membered heteroaryl; or two geminal R^(p) substituents can be joined to form ═O or ═S;

wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —OR^(i), —SR^(i), —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —N(R^(k))₂, —N(R^(k))₃ ⁺X⁻, —C(═O)R^(i), —CO₂H, —CHO, —CO₂R^(i), —OC(═O)R^(i), —OCO₂R^(i), —C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —NR^(k)C(═O)R^(i), —NR^(k)CO₂R^(i), —NR^(k)C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═NR^(k))R^(i), —C(═NR^(k))OR^(i), —OC(═NR^(k))R^(i), —OC(═NR^(k))OR^(i), —C(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —OC(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —NR^(k)C(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), —NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), —SO₂N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂R^(i), —SO₂OR^(i), —OSO₂R^(i), —S(═O)R^(i), —OS(═O)R^(i), —C(═S)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)SR^(i), —C(═S)SR^(i), —SC(S)SR^(i), —P(═O)₂R^(i), —OP(═O)₂R^(i), —P(═O)(R^(i))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(i))₂, —OP(═O)(OR^(j))₂, —P(═O)₂N(R^(k))₂, —OP(═O)₂N(R^(k))₂, —P(═O)(NR^(k))₂, —OP(═O)(NR^(k))₂, —NR^(k)P(═O)(OR)₂, —NR^(k)P(═O)(NR^(k))₂, —B(OR)₂, —BR^(i)(OR^(j)), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, —C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₃₋₁₄ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups; and wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —CN, —NO₂, —OH, —OR^(i), —SR^(i), —N(R^(k))₂, —N(R^(k))₃ ⁺X⁻, —C(═O)R^(i), —CO₂R^(i), —CO₂H, —OC(═O)R^(i), —OCO₂R^(i), —C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —NR^(k)C(═O)R^(i), —NR^(k)CO₂R^(i), NR^(k)C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), —NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), —SO₂N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂R^(i), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₆ aryl, and 5-6 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R^(m) groups; and wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —OR^(i), e.g., selected from —OCH₃, —OCF₃, —OCH₂CH₃, —OCH₂CF₃, -OiPr and -OnBu.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —SR^(i), e.g., selected from —SCH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —N(R^(k))₂ or —N(R^(k))₃ ⁺X⁻, e.g., selected from —NH₂ and —NH₃ ⁺X⁻.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —C(═O)R^(i), e.g., selected from —C(═O)CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —CO₂R^(i), e.g., selected from —CO₂CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, e.g., selected from —C(═O)NHOH, —C(═O)NH₂, —C(═O)NHCH₃, —C(═O)N(CH₃)₂, —C(═O)NHCH₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHCH₂CF₃ —C(═O)NH(CH₂)₁₋₆NH₃ ⁺X⁻, —C(═O)NHCH₂C(═O)OCH₃, —C(═O)NHCH₂C(═O)OH and —C(═O)NHCH₂CH₂OH.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —OC(═O)R^(i), e.g., selected from —OC(═O)CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —OCO₂R^(i), e.g., selected from —OCO₂CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —OC(═O)N(R^(k))₂, e.g., selected from —OC(═O)NH₂.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —NR^(k)C(═O)R^(i), e.g., selected from —NHC(═O)CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —NR^(k)CO₂R^(i), e.g., selected from —NHC(═O)OCH₃ and —NHC(═O)OtBu.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —NR^(k)C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, e.g., selected from —NHC(═O)NH₂.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —C(═O)NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), e.g., selected from —C(═O)NHSO₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHSO₂CH₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHSO₂C₅H₉ and —C(═O)NHSO₂iBu.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —NR^(k)SO₂R^(i), e.g., selected from —NHSO₂CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —SO₂N(R^(k))₂, e.g., selected from —SO₂NH₂, —SO₂N(CH₃)₂.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —SO₂R^(i), e.g., selected from —SO₂CH₃, —SO₂CH₂CH₃, —SO₂C₅H₉ and —SO₂iBu.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, e.g., selected from —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, -iPr, -nBu, —CF₃, —CH₂CH₂CO₂Me, —CH₂CH₂CO₂H and —CH₂CH₂CO₂NH₂.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is selected from —C(═O)R^(i), —CO₂H, and —SO₂R^(i). In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —C(═O)R^(i). In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —SO₂R^(i). In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —CO₂H or —SO₂CH₃. In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —CO₂H. In certain embodiments, R^(h) is —SO₂CH₃.

In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(h) is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), iodo (—I), —NH₂, —NH₃ ⁺X⁻, —CN, —NO₂, —SO₂CH₃, —SO₂CH₂CH₃, —SO₂C₅H₉, —SO₂iBu, —SO₂NH₂, —SO₂N(CH₃)₂, —C(═O)NHSO₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHSO₂CH₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHSO₂C₅H₉, —C(═O)NHSO₂iBu, —C(═O)CH₃, —CO₂H, —CO₂CH₃, —OC(═O)CH₃, —OCO₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHOH, —C(═O)NH₂, —C(═O)NHCH₃, —C(═O)N(CH₃)₂, —C(═O)NHCH₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHCH₂CF₃—C(═O)NH(CH₂)₁₋₆NH₃ ⁺X⁻, —OC(O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)CH₃, —NHC(═O)OCH₃, —NHC(═O)OtBu, —NHC(═O)NH₂, —NHSO₂CH₃, —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, -iPr, -nBu, —CF₃, —OH, —OCH₃, —SCH₃, —OCF₃, —OCH₂CH₃, —OCH₂CF₃, -OiPr, -OnBu, —CH₂CH₂CO₂Me, —CH₂CH₂CO₂H, —CH₂CH₂CO₂NH₂, C(═O)NHCH₂C(═O)OCH₃, —C(═O)NHCH₂C(═O)OH, —C(═O)NHCH₂CH₂OH, C₆ aryl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 R^(m) groups and 5-6 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 R^(m) groups; and wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is a C₆ aryl (e.g., phenyl)substituted with 0, 1, or 2 R^(m) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(h) is a C₆ aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 1 R^(m) group, and R^(m) is —CO₂H, —CO₂CH₃, —CO₂CH₂CH₃, and —C(═O)NH₂.

In certain embodiments, R^(h) is a 5-6 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 R^(m) groups. In certain embodiments, R^(h) is a 5 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, or 2 R^(m) groups. Exemplary 5 membered heteroaryl R^(h) groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, and tetrazolyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0 or 1 R^(m) groups. In certain embodiments, the R^(h) 5 membered heteroaryl group is selected from pyrazolyl and oxadiazolyl, wherein such groups are substituted with 0 or 1 R^(m) groups.

Embodiments of R^(i)

In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(i) is, independently, selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is unsubstituted.

In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted C₁₋₁₀ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted 3-14 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted C₆₋₁₄ aryl. In certain embodiments, R^(i) is unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.

Embodiments of R^(m)

In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(m) is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —CN, —NO₂, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR^(o), —ON(R^(n))₂, —N(R^(n))₂, —N(R^(n))₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR^(o))R^(n), —SH, —SR^(o), —SSR^(o), —C(═O)R^(o), —CO₂H, —CO₂R^(o), —OC(═O)R^(o), —OCO₂R^(o), —C(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)C(═O)R^(o), —NR^(n)CO₂R^(o), —NR^(n)C(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —C(═NR^(n))OR^(o), —OC(═NR^(n))R^(o), —OC(═NR^(n))OR^(o), —C(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —OC(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)C(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)SO₂R^(o), —SO₂N(R^(n))₂, —SO₂R^(o), —SO₂OR^(o), —OSO₂R^(o), —S(═O)R^(o), —C(═S)N(R^(n))₂, —C(═O)SR^(o), —C(═S)SR^(o), —SC(═S)SR^(o), —P(═O)₂R^(o), —P(═O)(R^(o))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(o))₂, —OP(═O)(OR^(o))₂, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(p) groups.

In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(m) is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —CN, —NO₂, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR^(o), —ON(R^(n))₂, —N(R^(n))₂, —N(R^(n))₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR^(o))R^(n), —SH, —SR^(o), —SSR^(o), —C(═O)R^(o), —CO₂H, —CO₂R^(o), —OC(═O)R^(o), —OCO₂R^(o), —C(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —OC(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —NRnC(═O)R^(o), —NR^(n)CO₂R^(o), —NR^(n)C(═O)N(R^(n))₂, —C(═NR^(n))OR^(o), —OC(═NR^(n))R^(o), —OC(═NR^(n))OR^(o), —C(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —OC(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)C(═NR^(n))N(R^(n))₂, —NR^(n)SO₂R^(o), —SO₂N(R^(n))₂, —SO₂R^(o), —SO₂OR^(o), —OSO₂R^(o), —S(═O)R^(o), —C(═S)N(R^(n))₂, —C(═O)SR^(o), —C(═S)SR^(o), —SC(═S)SR^(o), —P(═O)₂R^(o), —P(═O)(R^(o))₂, —OP(═O)(R^(o))₂, —OP(═O)(OR^(o))₂, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, 5-14 membered heteroaryl.

In certain embodiments, R^(m) is selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —NH₂, —NH₃ ⁺X⁻, —CN, —NO₂, —SO₂CH₃, —SO₂CH₂CH₃, —SO₂C₅H₉, —SO₂iBu, —SO₂NH₂, —SO₂N(CH₃)₂, —C(═O)NHSO₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHSO₂CH₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHSO₂C₅H₉, —C(═O)NHSO₂iBu, —C(═O)CH₃, —CO₂H, —CO₂CH₃, —OC(═O)CH₃, —OCO₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHOH, —C(═O)NH₂, —C(═O)NHCH₃, —C(═O)N(CH₃)₂, —C(═O)NHCH₂CH₃, —C(═O)NHCH₂CF₃ —C(═O)NH(CH₂)₁₋₆NH₃ ⁺X⁻, —OC(O)NH₂, —NHC(═O)CH₃, —NHC(═O)OCH₃, —NHC(═O)OtBu, —NHC(═O)NH₂, —NHSO₂CH₃, —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, -iPr, -nBu, —CF₃, —OH, —OCH₃, —OCF₃, —OCH₂CH₃, —OCH₂CF₃, -OiPr, -OnBu, —CH₂CH₂CO₂Me, —CH₂CH₂CO₂H, —CH₂CH₂CO₂NH₂, —C(═O)NHCH₂C(═O)OCH₃, —C(═O)NHCH₂C(═O)OH, and —C(═O)NHCH₂CH₂OH.

Embodiments of R^(k)

As used above and herein each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from —H, —OH, —OR^(i), —N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)R^(i), —C(═O)N(R^(k))₂, —CO₂R^(i), —SO₂R^(i), —C(═NR^(k))R^(i), —C(═NR^(k))OR^(i), —C(═NR^(k))N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂N(R^(k))₂, —SO₂R^(i), —SO₂OR^(i), —SOR^(i), —C(═S)N(R^(k))₂, —C(═O)SR^(i), —C(═S)SR^(i), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl (e.g., aralkyl), C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R^(m) groups, wherein R^(i), R^(k), R^(m) are as defined above and herein.

In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from —H, —C(═O)R^(i), —C(═O)OR^(i), —SO₂R^(i), or C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from —H or C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from —H and —CH₃. In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from —H. In certain embodiments, each instance of R^(k) is, independently, selected from —CH₃.

Groups R^(a), R^(b), and R^(e)

As generally defined above, wherein R^(d) is the group -L-Z, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(e) independently is selected from —H, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from —H, C₁₋₆ alkyl and C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from —H, C₁₋₃ alkyl and C₁₋₃ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from —H, —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃ and —CF₃. In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from —H, —CH₃, and —CF₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(a) and R^(b) are H and R^(e) is selected from C₁₋₃ alkyl and C₁₋₃ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(a) and R^(b) are H and R^(c) is selected from —CH₃ and —CF₃. In certain embodiments, R^(a) and R^(b) are H and R^(e) is —CH₃. In certain embodiments, R^(a) and R^(b) are H and R^(c) is —CF₃.

In certain embodiments, R^(b) and R^(c) are H and R^(a) is selected from C₁₋₃ alkyl and C₁₋₃ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R^(b) and R^(c) are H and R^(a) is selected from —CH₃ and —CF₃. In certain embodiments, R^(b) and R^(c) are H and R^(a) is —CH₃. In certain embodiments, R^(b) and R^(c) are H and R^(a) is —CF₃.

In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from H, —CH₃ and —CF₃. In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(c) independently is selected from H or —CH₃. In certain embodiments, each of R^(a), R^(b), and R^(e) is H.

Group R^(d)

As generally defined above, in certain embodiments, R^(d) is the group -L-Z,

wherein L is a covalent bond or a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms, and Z is selected from C₆₋₁₀ aryl.

Group L of R^(d)

As generally defined above, L is a covalent bond or a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atoms.

In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond.

In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen (—O—), sulfur (—S—) or nitrogen (e.g., —NR¹—) atoms.

In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more oxygen (—O—) atoms.

In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more sulfur (—S—) atoms.

In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one, two or three methylene units of L are optionally and independently replaced with one or more nitrogen (—NR¹—) atoms. However, in certain embodiments, wherein L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group comprising one, two or three nitrogen atoms, then L is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group and L is not the group —CH₂NR¹— wherein R¹ is H, C₁₋₆ alkyl or an amino protecting group.

In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one methylene unit of L is optionally and independently replaced with an oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom. In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one methylene unit of L is optionally and independently replaced with an oxygen atom. In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one methylene unit of L is optionally and independently replaced with a sulfur atom. In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group, wherein one methylene unit of L is optionally and independently replaced with a nitrogen atom.

In certain embodiments of L, the divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group. In certain embodiments of L, the divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group contains one oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom. In certain embodiments, the divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ hydrocarbon group (e.g., an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group).

For example, in certain embodiments, L is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group, wherein one methylene unit of L is replaced with an oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom. In certain embodiments, L is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group, wherein one methylene unit of L is replaced with an oxygen atom. In certain embodiments, L is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₅alkyl, wherein one methylene unit of L is replaced with a sulfur atom. In certain embodiments, L is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group, wherein one methylene unit of L is replaced with a nitrogen atom. However, in certain embodiments, wherein L is an unsubstituted divalent C₁₋₆ alkyl group, then L is not the group —CH₂NR¹— wherein R¹ is H, C₁₋₆ alkyl or an amino protecting group.

In certain embodiments, L is a divalent C₁ hydrocarbon group, wherein one methylene unit of L is replaced with an oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom, e.g., L is selected from oxygen (—O—), sulfur (—S—) or nitrogen (e.g., —NR¹—). In certain embodiments, L is oxygen (—O—). In certain embodiments, L is sulfur (—S—). In certain embodiments, L is nitrogen (e.g., —NR¹—).

In certain embodiments, L is selected from the group consisting of —(C(R¹⁰)₂)_(m)—, (C(R¹¹)₂)_(m)—O—(C(R¹²)₂)_(n), —(C(R¹¹)₂)_(m)—S—(C(R¹²)₂)_(n)—, or —(C(R¹¹)₂)_(m)—NR¹—(C(R¹²)₂)_(n)—, wherein m and n are, independently, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, and each instance of R¹⁰, R¹¹ and R¹² are, independently, selected from H, halogen or C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, each of R¹⁰, R¹¹ and R¹² are —H.

In certain embodiments, L is —(C(R¹⁰)₂)_(m)—. In certain embodiments, L is selected from —CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂— and —CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—.

In certain embodiments, L is —(C(R¹¹)₂)_(m)—O—(C(R¹²)₂)_(n)—. In certain embodiments, L is selected from —O—, —CH₂O—, —OCH₂—, —OCH₂CH₂—, —OCH₂CH₂—, —OCH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂O—, —CH₂OCH₂CH₂—, and —CH₂CH₂OCH₂—.

In certain embodiments, L is —(C(R¹¹)₂)_(m)—S—(C(R¹²)₂)_(n)—. In certain embodiments, L is selected from —S—, —CH₂S—, —SCH₂—, —SCH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂S—, —SCH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂S—, —CH₂SCH₂CH₂—, and —CH₂CH₂SCH₂—.

In certain embodiments, L is —(C(R¹¹)₂)_(m)—NR¹—(C(R¹²)₂)_(n)—. In certain embodiments, L is selected from —NR¹—, —CH₂NR¹—, —NR¹CH₂—, —NR¹CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂NR¹—, —NR¹CH₂CH₂CH₂—, —CH₂CH₂CH₂NR¹—, —CH₂NR¹CH₂CH₂—, and —CH₂CH₂NR¹CH₂—, wherein R¹ is selected from H, an C₁₋₆ alkyl or an amino protecting group.

In certain embodiments, R¹ is selected from H or C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹ is hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R¹ is —CH₃.

Group Z of R^(d)

As defined generally above, Z is C₆₋₁₄ aryl. In certain embodiments, Z is C₆₋₁₄ aryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R¹⁵ groups. In certain embodiments, Z is C₆ aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R¹⁵ groups. In certain embodiments, Z is a C₁₀ aryl (e.g., naphthyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 R¹⁵ groups.

In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl. In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁵ groups. In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R¹⁵ groups. In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with 0, 1 or 2 R¹⁵ groups. In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with 0 or 1 R¹⁵ groups. In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 2 R¹⁵ groups). In certain embodiments, Z is a monosubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 1 R¹⁵ group). In certain embodiments, Z is an unsubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 0 R¹⁵ groups).

In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with at least one ortho R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with at least one meta R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is phenyl substituted with at least one para R¹⁵ group.

In certain embodiments, Z is a monosubstituted phenyl substituted with one ortho R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is a monosubstituted phenyl substituted with one meta R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is a monosubstituted substituted with one para R¹⁵ group.

In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted phenyl substituted with an ortho R¹⁵ group and a meta R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted phenyl substituted with an ortho R¹⁵ group and a para R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted phenyl substituted with a meta R¹⁵ group and a para R¹⁵ group. In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted phenyl substituted with two meta R¹⁵ groups.

In certain embodiments, Z is a phenyl group of the formula:

wherein z is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R¹⁵ is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, z is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In certain embodiments, z is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, z is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, z is 0 or 1. In certain embodiments, z is 3. In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted phenyl group (i.e., wherein z is 2). In certain embodiments, Z is a monosubstituted phenyl group (i.e., wherein z is 1). In certain embodiments, Z is an unsubstituted phenyl group (i.e., wherein z is 0).

For example, in certain embodiments, Z is a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group of an one of the formulae:

wherein

-   -   R¹⁵ is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, Z is a naphthyl. In certain embodiments, Z is a naphthyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein z is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, and R¹⁵ is as defined below and herein. In certain embodiments, z is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4. In certain embodiments, z is 0, 1, 2 or 3. In certain embodiments, z is 0, 1 or 2. In certain embodiments, z is 0 or 1. In certain embodiments, Z is a trisubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein z is 3). In certain embodiments, Z is a disubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein z is 2). In certain embodiments, Z is a monosubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein z is 1). In certain embodiments, Z is an unsubstituted naphthyl group (i.e., wherein z is 0).

For example, in certain embodiments, Z is a substituted or unsubstituted 1-naphthyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R¹⁵ is as defined below and herein.

In certain embodiments, Z is a substituted or unsubstituted 2-naphthyl group of any one of the formulae:

wherein R¹⁵ is as defined below and herein. R¹⁵ Groups

As used herein, each instance of R¹⁵ is, independently, selected from halogen (i.e., fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I)), —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR¹⁶, —ON(R¹⁸)₂, —N(R¹⁸)₂, —N(R¹⁸)₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR¹⁷)R¹⁸, —SH, —SR¹⁶, —SSR¹⁷, —C(═O)R¹⁶, —CO₂H, —CHO, —CO₂R¹⁶, —OC(═O)R¹⁶, —OCO₂R¹⁶, —C(═O)N(R¹⁸)₂, —OC(═O)N(R¹⁸)₂, —NR¹⁸C(═O)R¹⁶, —NR¹⁸CO₂R¹⁶, —NR¹⁸C(═O)N(R¹⁸)₂, —C(═NR¹⁸)R¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁸)OR¹⁶, —OC(═NR¹⁸)R¹⁶, —OC(═NR¹⁸)OR¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁸)N(R¹⁸)₂, —OC(═NR¹⁸)N(R¹⁸)₂, —NR¹⁸C(═NR¹⁸)N(R¹⁸)₂, —C(═O)NR¹⁸SO₂R¹⁶, —NR¹⁸SO₂R¹⁶, —SO₂N(R¹⁸)₂, —SO₂R¹⁶, —SO₂OR¹⁶, —OSO₂R¹⁶, —S(═O)R¹⁶, —OS(═O)R¹⁶, —Si(R¹⁶)₃, —OSi(R¹⁶)₃—C(═S)N(R¹⁸)₂, —C(═O)SR¹⁶, —C(═S)SR¹⁶, —SC(S)SR¹⁶, —P(═O)₂R¹⁶, —OP(═O)₂R¹⁶, —P(═O)(R¹⁶)₂, —OP(═O)(R¹⁶)₂, —OP(═O)(OR¹⁷)₂, —P(═O)₂N(R¹⁸)₂, —OP(═O)₂N(R¹⁸)₂, —P(═O)(NR¹⁸)₂, —OP(═O)(NR¹⁸)₂, —NR18P(═O)(OR¹⁷)₂, —NR¹⁸P(═O)(NR¹⁸)₂, —P(R¹⁷)₂, —P(R¹⁷)₃, —OP(R¹⁷)₂, —OP(R¹⁷)₃, —B(OR¹⁷)₂, —BR¹⁶(OR¹⁷), C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₄ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups; or two vicinal R¹⁵ groups are replaced with the group —O(C(R²)₂)₁₋₂O— wherein each R² is independently H, C₁₋₆alkyl or halogen;

each instance of R¹⁶ is, independently, selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups;

each instance of R¹⁸ is, independently, selected from hydrogen, —OH, —OR¹⁶, —N(R¹⁷)₂, —CN, —C(═O)R¹⁶, —C(═O)N(R¹⁷)₂, —CO₂R¹⁶, —SO₂R¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁷)OR¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁷)N(R¹⁷)₂, —SO₂N(R¹⁷)₂, —SO₂R¹⁷, —SO₂OR¹⁷, —SOR¹⁶, —C(═S)N(R¹⁷)₂, —C(═O)SR¹⁷, —C(═S)SR¹⁷, —P(═O)₂R¹⁶, —P(═O)(R¹⁶)₂, —P(═O)₂N(R¹⁷)₂, —P(═O)(NR¹⁷)₂, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R¹⁷ groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups;

each instance of R¹⁷ is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R¹⁷ groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups;

each instance of R¹⁹ is, independently, selected from halogen, —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OR²⁰, —ON(R²¹)₂, —N(R²¹)₂, —N(R²¹)₃ ⁺X⁻, —N(OR²⁰)R²¹, —SH, —SR²⁰, —SSR²⁰, —C(═O)R²⁰, —CO₂H, —CO₂R²⁰, —OC(═O)R²⁰, —OCO₂R²⁰, —C(═O)N(R²¹)₂, —OC(═O)N(R²¹)₂, —NR²¹C(═O)R²⁰, —NR²¹CO₂R²⁰, —NR²¹C(═O)N(R²¹)₂, —C(═NR²¹)OR²⁰, —OC(═NR²¹)R²⁰, —OC(═NR²¹)OR²⁰, —C(═NR²¹)N(R²¹)₂, —OC(═NR²¹)N(R²¹)₂, —NR²¹C(═NR²¹)N(R²¹)₂, —NR²¹SO₂R²⁰, —SO₂N(R²¹)₂, —SO₂R²⁰, —SO₂OR²⁰, —OSO₂R²⁰, —S(═O)R²⁰, —Si(R²⁰)₃, —OSi(R²⁰)₃, —C(═S)N(R²¹)₂, —C(═O)SR²⁰, —C(═S)SR²⁰, —SC(═S)SR²⁰, —P(═O)₂R²⁰, —P(═O)(R²⁰)₂, —OP(═O)(R²⁰)₂, —OP(═O)(OR²⁰)₂, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R²² groups, or two geminal R¹⁹ substituents can be joined to form ═O or ═S;

each instance of R²⁰ is, independently, selected from C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R²² groups;

each instance of R²¹ is, independently, selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆-perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆ alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R²¹ groups attached to an N atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R²² groups; and

each instance of R²² is, independently, halogen, —CN, —NO₂, —N₃, —SO₂H, —SO₃H, —OH, —OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —ON(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃X, —NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂X, —NH₂(C₁₋₆alkyl)X, —NH₃X, —N(OC₁₋₆ alkyl)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —N(OH)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NH(OH), —SH, —SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —SS(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —CO₂H, —CO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OCO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═O)NH₂, —C(═O)N(C₁₋₆alkyl)₂, —OC(═O)NH(C₁₋₆alkyl), —NHC(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)C(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHCO₂(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —NHC(═O)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —NHC(═O)NH₂, —C(═NH)O(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═NH)(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(═NH)OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —C(═NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —C(═NH)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═NH)NH₂, —OC(═NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OC(NH)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —OC(NH)NH₂, —NHC(NH)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —NHC(═NH)NH₂, —NHSO₂(C₁₋₆alkyl), —SO₂N(C₁₋₁₆ alkyl)₂, —SO₂NH(C₁₋₆alkyl), —SO₂NH₂, —SO₂C₁₋₅ alkyl, —SO₂OC₁₋₆ alkyl, —OSO₂C₁₋₆ alkyl, —SOC₁₋₆ alkyl, —Si(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃, —OSi(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₃-C(═S)N(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, C(═S)NH(C₁₋₆ alkyl), C(═S)NH₂, —C(═O)S(C₁₋₆ alkyl), —C(═S)SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —SC(═S)SC₁₋₆ alkyl, —P(═O)₂(C₁₋₆alkyl), —P(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OP(═O)(C₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, —OP(═O)(OC₁₋₆ alkyl)₂, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or two geminal R²² substituents can be joined to form ═O or ═S;

wherein X⁻ is a counterion.

In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁵ is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —OR¹⁶, —C(═O)N(R¹⁸)₂, —SO₂N(R¹⁸)₂, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I), —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I) and —OR¹⁶. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is, independently, selected from fluoro (—F), bromo (—Br), chloro (—Cl), and iodo (—I) and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶. In certain embodiments, R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₆₋₁₀ aryl, and 5-6 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₁₀ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₄ alkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₂alkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶ and R¹⁶ is —CH₃, -Et, -iPr, -nBu, -n-pentyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶ and R¹⁶ is —CH₃.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₄ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₁₋₂ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶ and R¹⁶ is —CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₂CF₃, —CCl₃, —CFCl₂, or —CF₂Cl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶ and R¹⁶ is —CF₃.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₂₋₆ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₂₋₄ alkenyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from —CH₂CHCH₂ (i.e., allyl).

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₂₋₆ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₂₋₄ alkynyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from —CH₂CCH (i.e., propargyl).

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from C₆ aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is phenyl substituted with 0, 1 or 2 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is phenyl substituted with 1 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is phenyl substituted with 0 R¹⁹ groups (i.e., —C₆H₅).

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from 5-6 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from a 6 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from pyridinyl (e.g., 2-pyridinyl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —OR¹⁶, and R¹⁶ is selected from pyrimidinyl (e.g., 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R¹⁹ groups.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —C(═O)N(R⁸)₂.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —SO₂N(R¹⁸)₂.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₁₋₆ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₁₋₄ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₁₋₂ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₂CF₃, —CCl₃, —CFCl₂, and —CF₂Cl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —CF₃.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₁₋₁₀ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₆ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups. R¹⁵ is C₁₋₄ alkyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, the R¹⁵ alkyl group is unsubstituted (0 R¹⁹ groups). In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —CH₃, -Et, -iPr, -nBu, -n-pentyl.

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₆ alkenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₄ alkenyl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, the R¹⁵ alkenyl group is unsubstituted (0 R¹⁹ groups). In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —CH₂CHCH₂ (i.e., allyl),

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₆ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₂₋₄ alkynyl substituted with 0, 1 or 2 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, the R¹⁵ alkynyl group is unsubstituted (0 R¹⁹ groups). In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is —CH₂CCH (i.e., propargyl).

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is C₆₋₁₄ aryl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from C₆ aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is an unsubstituted phenyl. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is a monosubstituted phenyl (i.e., substituted with 1 R¹⁹ group).

In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is 5-14 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is 5-6 membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is a 6-membered heteroaryl substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is pyridinyl (e.g., 2-pyridinyl, 3-pyridinyl, 4-pyridinyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is pyrimidinyl (e.g., 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl, 5-pyrimidinyl) substituted with 0, 1, 2 or 3 R¹⁹ groups. In certain embodiments, the R¹⁵ heteroaryl group is unsubstituted (0 R¹⁹ groups).

R¹⁸Groups

In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁸ is, independently, selected from —H, —OH, —OR¹⁶, —N(R⁷)₂, —C(═O)R¹⁶, —C(═O)N(R¹⁷)₂, —CO₂R¹⁶, —SO₂R¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁷)R¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁷)OR¹⁶, —C(═NR¹⁷)N(R¹⁷)₂, —SO₂N(R¹⁷)₂, —SO₂R¹⁶, —SO₂OR¹⁶, —SOR¹⁶, —C(═S)N(R¹⁷)₂, —C(═O)SR16, —C(═S)SR¹⁶, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl (e.g., aralkyl), C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, C₃₋₁₀ carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C₆₋₁₄ aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R¹⁹ groups, wherein R¹⁶, R¹⁷, R¹⁹ are as defined above and herein.

In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁷ is, independently, selected from —H, —C(═O)R¹⁶, —C(═O)OR¹⁶, —SO₂R¹⁶, or C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁷ is, independently, selected from —H or C₁₋₆ alkyl. In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁷ is, independently, selected from —H and —CH₃. In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁷ is, independently, selected from —H. In certain embodiments, each instance of R¹⁷ is, independently, selected from —CH₃.

Additional Embodiments of Compounds of Formula (I)

As defined generally above, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (I):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein G, R^(a), R^(b), R^(e) and R^(d) are as defined herein.

In one aspect, wherein R^(a), R^(b), R^(c) are each H, and R^(d) is the group Z, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein G and Z are as defined herein. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, G is —OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —Br. However, in certain embodiments, G is not halogen (e.g., —Br, —Cl, —I).

For example, in certain embodiments, wherein L is a covalent bond, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c) are each H, and G is the group —OR^(e), the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-a):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein R^(e) and Z are as defined herein.

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is a phenyl ring, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-b):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein G, L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, z is 2 and R¹⁵ is at the meta and para position. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, G is —OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —Br. However, in certain embodiments, G is not halogen (e.g., —Br, —Cl, —I). In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is para to provide compounds of the formula (II-c):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein G, L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, G is —OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —Br. However, in certain embodiments, G is not halogen (e.g., —Br, —Cl, —I). In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

For example, in certain embodiments, z is 2 and one R⁵ is meta and one R⁵ is para to provide compounds of the formula (II-c):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein G, L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, G is —OR^(e). In certain embodiments, G is —Br. However, in certain embodiments, G is not halogen (e.g., —Br, —Cl, —I). In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

For example, in certain embodiments, wherein Z is an phenyl ring, and G is the group —OR^(e), the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-d):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵, R^(e) and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is an phenyl ring, G is the group —OR^(e), and R^(e) is an phenyl ring, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-e):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵, R^(h), x and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is an phenyl ring, G is the group —OR^(e), and R^(e) is an 5-membered heteroaryl ring, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-f):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein Y^(a), Y^(b), Y^(c), Y^(d), L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is an phenyl ring, G is the group —OR^(e), and R^(e) is an 6-membered heteroaryl ring, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-g):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein W^(a), W^(b), W^(c), W^(d), W^(e), L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(e), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, W^(b) is N and W^(a), W^(e), W^(d) and W^(e) are selected from CH or CR^(h). In certain embodiments, In certain embodiments, W^(b) is N, W^(e) is CR^(h) and W^(a), W^(e), W^(d) and W^(e) are each CH. In certain embodiments, W^(b) and W^(d) are N and Wa, We, W^(d) and W^(e) are selected from CH or CR^(h).

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is a phenyl ring, G is the group —OR^(e), and R^(e) is an 9-membered heteroaryl ring, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-h):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein Y^(e), Y^(f), Y^(g), Y^(i), Y^(j), Y^(k), Y^(k), Y^(n), L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond.

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is a phenyl ring, G is the group —OR^(e), and R^(e) is an 10-membered heteroaryl ring, the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-i):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof,

wherein W^(f), W^(g), W^(h), W^(i), W^(j), W^(k), W^(m), W^(n), L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond.

In certain embodiments, wherein Z is a phenyl ring, and G is the group —NR^(e)R^(f), the present invention provides compounds of the formula (II-j):

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, wherein L, R^(a), R^(b), R^(c), R^(e), R^(f), R¹⁵ and z are as defined herein. For example, in certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the ortho position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the meta position. In certain embodiments, z is 1 and R¹⁵ is at the para position. In certain embodiments, R¹⁵ is selected from —OR¹⁶ and C₁₋₁₀ perhaloalkyl. In certain embodiments, L is a covalent bond. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 3-10 membered heterocycyl ring. In certain embodiments, R^(e) and R^(f) are joined to form a 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring.

Exemplary Compouds of the Present Invention

Exemplary compounds of formulae (I), (II), and subgenera thereof, are set forth in the Tables 1a-1m below, and are also described in more detail in Examples 1-253, provided herein, Compounds were assayed as inhibitors of human FAAH using the Method described in detail in Example 254.

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1a, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1a

Com- pound G R^(a) R^(c) I-10 —Br —H —H I-17 —Cl —H —H I-23

—H —H I-24

—H —H I-25

—H —H I-26

—H —H I-27

—H —H I-28

—H —H I-29

—H —H I-30

—H —H I-31

—H —H I-32

—H —H I-33

—H —H I-34

—H —H I-35

—H —H I-36

—H —H I-37

—H —H I-39

—H —H I-40

—H —H I-41

—H —H I-42

—H —H I-43

—H —H I-44

—H —H I-45 —OMe —H —H I-47

—H —H I-56

—H —H I-57

—H —H I-58

—H —H I-59

—H —H I-60

—H —H I-61

—H —H I-62

—H —H I-63

—H —H I-64

—H —H I-65

—H —H I-66

—H —H I-67

—H —H I-68

—H —H I-69

—H —H I-90

—H —H I-92

—H —H I-93

—H —H I-94

—H —H I-98

—H —H I-99

—H —H I-100

—H —H I-110

—H —H I-111

—H —H I-146

—H —H I-147

—H —H I-155

—H —H I-159

—H —H I-160

—H —H I-197

—H —H I-243

—H —H I-244

—H —H I-245

—H —H I-256

—H —H I-257

—H —H I-260

—H —H I-78 —Br —CH₃ —H (cis) I-82 —Br —CH₃ —H (trans) I-91 (trans)

—CH₃ —H I-76 —Br —H —CH₃ I-89

—H —CH₃ I-130 —Br —H —CF₃ I-131

—H —CF₃ I-95 —Br —H —CH₂CH₃

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1b, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1b

Com- pound G R^(a) R^(c) I-14 —Br —H —H I-46

—H —H I-53

—H —H I-54

—H —H I-55

—H —H I-70

—H —H I-71

—H —H I-72

—H —H I-73

—H —H I-83

—H —H I-84

—H —H I-85

—H —H I-86

—H —H I-96

—H —H I-97

—H —H I-105

—H —H I-106

—H —H I-107

—H —H I-108

—H —H I-109

—H —H I-112

—H —H I-118

—H —H I-128

—H —H I-132

—H —H I-133

—H —H I-134

—H —H I-135

—H —H I-136

—H —H I-151

—H —H I-152

—H —H I-157

—H —H I-161

—H —H I-162

—H —H I-163

—H —H I-165

—H —H I-173

—H —H I-174

—H —H I-175

—H —H I-176

—H —H I-177

—H —H I-178

—H —H I-182

—H —H I-183

—H —H I-184

—H —H I-186

—H —H I-187

—H —H I-188

—H —H I-189

—H —H I-190

—H —H I-191

—H —H I-192

—H —H I-193

—H —H I-194

—H —H I-195

—H —H I-199

—H —H I-200

—H —H I-201

—H —H I-218

—H —H I-220

—H —H I-221

—H —H I-223

—H —H I-224

—H —H I-225

—H —H I-226

—H —H I-230

—H —H I-236

—H —H I-246

—H —H I-248

—H —H I-249

—H —H I-250

—H —H I-251

—H —H I-253

—H —H I-255

—H —H I-258

—H —H I-75 —Br —H —CH₃ I-88

—H —CH₃ I-113

—H —CH₃ I-114

—H —CH₃ I-115

—H —CH₃ I-116

—H —CH₃ I-117

—H —CH₃ I-129

—H —CH₃ I-154

—H —CH₃ I-156

—H —CH₃ I-158

—H —CH₃ I-164

—H —CH₃ I-167

—H —CH₃ I-171

—H —CH₃ I-172

—H —CH₃ I-185

—H —CH₃ I-196

—H —CH₃ I-198

—H —CH₃ I-222

—H —CH₃ I-227

—H —CH₃ I-228

—H —CH₃ I-229

—H —CH₃ I-231

—H —CH₃ I-232

—H —CH₃ I-233

—H —CH₃ I-234

—H —CH₃ I-235

—H —CH₃ I-240

—H —CH₃ I-241

—H —CH₃ I-242

—H —CH₃ I-261

—H —CH₃

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1c, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1c

Compound G R^(a) R^(c) I-168

—H —H I-169

—H —H I-170

—H —H I-216

—H —H I-217

—H —H I-219

—H —H I-238

—H —H I-259

—H —H

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1d, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1d

R¹⁵ = Compound G R^(a) R^(c) halogen I-120 —Br —H —H —F I-121

—H —H —F I-122

—H —H —F I-123

—H —H —F I-124 —Br —H —H —Cl I-125

—H —H —Cl

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1e, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1e

R¹⁶ = unsubstituted Compound G R^(a) R^(c) alkyl, alkynyl I-142 —Br —H —H

I-143

—H —H

I-144

—H —H

I-145

—H —H

I-140

—H —H

I-141

—H —H

I-15 —Br —H —H

I-137

—H —H n-butyl I-138

—H —H n-butyl I-139

—H —H n-butyl I-6 —Br —H —H —CH₃ I-38

—H —H —CH₃ I-77 —Br —CH₃ —H —CH₃ (trans)

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1f, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1f

Com- R¹⁵ = pound G R^(a) R^(c) alkyl, aryl I-20 —Br —H —H n-butyl I-180

—H —H n-butyl I-181

—H —H n-butyl I-179 —Br —H —H n-pentyl I-102 —Br —H —CH₃ —C₆H₅ I-104

—H —CH₃ —C₆H₅ I-9 —Br —H —H —C₆H₅ I-101

—H —H —C₆H₅ I-103

—H —H —C₆H₅

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1g, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1g

Compound G R¹⁵ = halogen I-3 —Br —Cl I-153

—Cl I-148 —Br —Br I-149

—Br I-150

—Br I-237

—Br I-2 —Br —F

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1h, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1h

Compound G R^(a) R^(c) I-12 —Br —H —H I-87

—H —H

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1i, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1i

Compound G R^(a) R^(c) I-1  —Br —H —H I-166

—H —H

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1j, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1j

Compound G R^(a) R^(c) R² = H, halogen I-126 —Br —H —H —F, —F I-127

—H —H —F, —F I-16  —Br —H —H —H

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1k, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1k

Compound G R^(a) R^(c) R¹⁸ I-22  —Br —H —H H, —CH₂Ph I-214

—H —H H, —CH₂Ph I-215

—H —H H, —CH₂Ph I-203 —Br —H —H —CH₃, —CH₃ I-212

—H —H —CH₃, —CH₃ I-202 —Br —H —H

I-204 —Br —H —H —H, —CH₃ I-208 —Br

I-209 —Br —H —H

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1l, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1l

Compound G R^(a) R^(c) R¹⁸ I-205 —Br —H —H

I-207 —Br —H —H —H, —CH₃ I-206 —Br —H —H —CH₃, —CH₃ I-210 —Br —H —H

I-211 —Br —H —H

I-213

—H —H —CH₃, —CH₃

In certain embodiments, the compound is any one of the compounds provided in Table 1m, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof:

TABLE 1m

I-4

I-5

I-7

I-8

I-11

I-13

I-119

I-18

I-19

I-21

I-48

I-49

I-50

I-51

I-52

I-74

However, in certain embodiments of formulae (I) and (II), or subgenera thereof, any one of the following compounds is specifically excluded:

II. Pharmaceutical Compositions

In certain embodiments, the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

Pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include any and all solvents, diluents or other liquid vehicles, dispersion or suspension aids, surface active agents, isotonic agents, thickening or emulsifying agents, preservatives, solid binders, lubricants and the like, as suited to the particular dosage form desired. General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions agents can be found, for example, in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Sixteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1980), and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21^(st) Edition (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005).

Pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be prepared by any method known in the art of pharmacology. In general, such preparatory methods include the steps of bringing the active ingredient into association with a carrier and/or one or more other accessory ingredients, and then, if necessary and/or desirable, shaping and/or packaging the product into a desired single- or multi-dose unit.

Pharmaceutical compositions can be prepared, packaged, and/or sold in bulk, as a single unit dose, and/or as a plurality of single unit doses. As used herein, a “unit dose” is discrete amount of the pharmaceutical composition comprising a predetermined amount of the active ingredient. The amount of the active ingredient is generally equal to the dosage of the active ingredient which would be administered to a subject and/or a convenient fraction of such a dosage such as, for example, one-half or one-third of such a dosage.

Relative amounts of the active ingredient, the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and/or any additional ingredients in a pharmaceutical composition of the invention will vary, depending upon the identity, size, and/or condition of the subject treated and further depending upon the route by which the composition is to be administered. By way of example, the composition may comprise between 0.1% and 100% (w/w) active ingredient.

Pharmaceutically acceptable excipients used in the manufacture of provided pharmaceutical compositions include inert diluents, dispersing and/or granulating agents, surface active agents and/or emulsifiers, disintegrating agents, binding agents, preservatives, buffering agents, lubricating agents, and/or oils. Excipients such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes, coloring agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents may also be present in the composition.

Exemplary diluents include calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, calcium phosphate, dicalcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, calcium hydrogen phosphate, sodium phosphate lactose, sucrose, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, kaolin, mannitol, sorbitol, inositol, sodium chloride, dry starch, cornstarch, powdered sugar, etc., and combinations thereof.

Exemplary granulating and/or dispersing agents include potato starch, corn starch, tapioca starch, sodium starch glycolate, clays, alginic acid, guar gum, citrus pulp, agar, bentonite, cellulose and wood products, natural sponge, cation-exchange resins, calcium carbonate, silicates, sodium carbonate, cross-linked poly(vinyl-pyrrolidone) (crospovidone), sodium carboxymethyl starch (sodium starch glycolate), carboxymethyl cellulose, cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (croscarmellose), methylcellulose, pregelatinized starch (starch 1500), microcrystalline starch, water insoluble starch, calcium carboxymethyl cellulose, magnesium aluminum silicate (Veegum), sodium lauryl sulfate, quaternary ammonium compounds, etc., and combinations thereof.

Exemplary surface active agents and/or emulsifiers include natural emulsifiers (e.g. acacia, agar, alginic acid, sodium alginate, tragacanth, chondrux, cholesterol, xanthan, pectin, gelatin, egg yolk, casein, wool fat, cholesterol, wax, and lecithin), colloidal clays (e.g. bentonite [aluminum silicate] and Veegum [magnesium aluminum silicate]), long chain amino acid derivatives, high molecular weight alcohols (e.g. stearyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, oleyl alcohol, triacetin monostearate, ethylene glycol distearate, glyceryl monostearate, and propylene glycol monostearate, polyvinyl alcohol), carbomers (e.g. carboxy polymethylene, polyacrylic acid, acrylic acid polymer, and carboxyvinyl polymer), carrageenan, cellulosic derivatives (e.g. carboxymethylcellulose sodium, powdered cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, methylcellulose), sorbitan fatty acid esters (e.g. polyoxyethylene sorbitan monolaurate [Tween 20], polyoxyethylene sorbitan [Tween 60], polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate [Tween 80], sorbitan monopalmitate [Span 40], sorbitan monostearate [Span 60], sorbitan tristearate [Span 65], glyceryl monooleate, sorbitan monooleate [Span 80]), polyoxyethylene esters (e.g. polyoxyethylene monostearate [Myrj 45], polyoxyethylene hydrogenated castor oil, polyethoxylated castor oil, polyoxymethylene stearate, and Solutol), sucrose fatty acid esters, polyethylene glycol fatty acid esters (e.g. Cremophor), polyoxyethylene ethers, (e.g. polyoxyethylene lauryl ether [Brij 30]), poly(vinyl-pyrrolidone), diethylene glycol monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate, sodium oleate, potassium oleate, ethyl oleate, oleic acid, ethyl laurate, sodium lauryl sulfate, Pluronic F 68, Poloxamer 188, cetrimonium bromide, cetylpyridinium chloride, benzalkonium chloride, docusate sodium, etc. and/or combinations thereof.

Exemplary binding agents include starch (e.g. cornstarch and starch paste), gelatin, sugars (e.g. sucrose, glucose, dextrose, dextrin, molasses, lactose, lactitol, mannitol, etc.), natural and synthetic gums (e.g. acacia, sodium alginate, extract of Irish moss, panwar gum, ghatti gum, mucilage of isapol husks, carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, cellulose acetate, poly(vinyl-pyrrolidone), magnesium aluminum silicate (Veegum), and larch arabogalactan), alginates, polyethylene oxide, polyethylene glycol, inorganic calcium salts, silicic acid, polymethacrylates, waxes, water, alcohol, etc., and/or combinations thereof.

Exemplary preservatives include antioxidants, chelating agents, antimicrobial preservatives, antifungal preservatives, alcohol preservatives, acidic preservatives, and other preservatives.

Exemplary antioxidants include alpha tocopherol, ascorbic acid, acorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, monothioglycerol, potassium metabisulfite, propionic acid, propyl gallate, sodium ascorbate, sodium bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, and sodium sulfite.

Exemplary chelating agents include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and salts and hydrates thereof (e.g., sodium edetate, disodium edetate, trisodium edetate, calcium disodium edetate, dipotassium edetate, and the like), citric acid and salts and hydrates thereof (e.g., citric acid monohydrate), fumaric acid and salts and hydrates thereof, malic acid and salts and hydrates thereof, phosphoric acid and salts and hydrates thereof, and tartaric acid and salts and hydrates thereof. Exemplary antimicrobial preservatives include benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, benzyl alcohol, bronopol, cetrimide, cetylpyridinium chloride, chlorhexidine, chlorobutanol, chlorocresol, chloroxylenol, cresol, ethyl alcohol, glycerin, hexetidine, imidurea, phenol, phenoxyethanol, phenylethyl alcohol, phenylmercuric nitrate, propylene glycol, and thimerosal.

Exemplary antifungal preservatives include butyl paraben, methyl paraben, ethyl paraben, propyl paraben, benzoic acid, hydroxybenzoic acid, potassium benzoate, potassium sorbate, sodium benzoate, sodium propionate, and sorbic acid.

Exemplary alcohol preservatives include ethanol, polyethylene glycol, phenol, phenolic compounds, bisphenol, chlorobutanol, hydroxybenzoate, and phenylethyl alcohol.

Exemplary acidic preservatives include vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin E, beta-carotene, citric acid, acetic acid, dehydroacetic acid, ascorbic acid, sorbic acid, and phytic acid.

Other preservatives include tocopherol, tocopherol acetate, deteroxime mesylate, cetrimide, butylated hydroxyanisol (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluened (BHT), ethylenediamine, sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS), sodium lauryl ether sulfate (SLES), sodium bisulfite, sodium metabisulfite, potassium sulfite, potassium metabisulfite, Glydant Plus, Phenonip, methylparaben, Germall 115, Germaben II, Neolone, Kathon, and Euxyl. In certain embodiments, the preservative is an anti-oxidant. In other embodiments, the preservative is a chelating agent.

Exemplary buffering agents include citrate buffer solutions, acetate buffer solutions, phosphate buffer solutions, ammonium chloride, calcium carbonate, calcium chloride, calcium citrate, calcium glubionate, calcium gluceptate, calcium gluconate, D-gluconic acid, calcium glycerophosphate, calcium lactate, propanoic acid, calcium levulinate, pentanoic acid, dibasic calcium phosphate, phosphoric acid, tribasic calcium phosphate, calcium hydroxide phosphate, potassium acetate, potassium chloride, potassium gluconate, potassium mixtures, dibasic potassium phosphate, monobasic potassium phosphate, potassium phosphate mixtures, sodium acetate, sodium bicarbonate, sodium chloride, sodium citrate, sodium lactate, dibasic sodium phosphate, monobasic sodium phosphate, sodium phosphate mixtures, tromethamine, magnesium hydroxide, aluminum hydroxide, alginic acid, pyrogen-free water, isotonic saline, Ringer's solution, ethyl alcohol, etc., and combinations thereof.

Exemplary lubricating agents include magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid, silica, talc, malt, glyceryl behanate, hydrogenated vegetable oils, polyethylene glycol, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, leucine, magnesium lauryl sulfate, sodium lauryl sulfate, etc., and combinations thereof.

Exemplary oils include almond, apricot kernel, avocado, babassu, bergamot, black current seed, borage, cade, camomile, canola, caraway, carnauba, castor, cinnamon, cocoa butter, coconut, cod liver, coffee, corn, cotton seed, emu, eucalyptus, evening primrose, fish, flaxseed, geraniol, gourd, grape seed, hazel nut, hyssop, isopropyl myristate, jojoba, kukui nut, lavandin, lavender, lemon, litsea cubeba, macademia nut, mallow, mango seed, meadowfoam seed, mink, nutmeg, olive, orange, orange roughy, palm, palm kernel, peach kernel, peanut, poppy seed, pumpkin seed, rapeseed, rice bran, rosemary, safflower, sandalwood, sasquana, savoury, sea buckthorn, sesame, shea butter, silicone, soybean, sunflower, tea tree, thistle, tsubaki, vetiver, walnut, and wheat germ oils. Exemplary oils include, but are not limited to, butyl stearate, caprylic triglyceride, capric triglyceride, cyclomethicone, diethyl sebacate, dimethicone 360, isopropyl myristate, mineral oil, octyldodecanol, oleyl alcohol, silicone oil, and combinations thereof.

Liquid dosage forms for oral and parenteral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredients, the liquid dosage forms may comprise inert diluents commonly used in the art such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, dimethylformamide, oils (e.g., cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor, and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof. Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents. In certain embodiments for parenteral administration, the conjugates of the invention are mixed with solubilizing agents such as Cremophor, alcohols, oils, modified oils, glycols, polysorbates, cyclodextrins, polymers, and combinations thereof.

Injectable preparations, for example, sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents. The sterile injectable preparation can be a sterile injectable solution, suspension or emulsion in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, for example, as a solution in 1,3-butanediol. Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that can be employed are water, Ringer's solution, U.S.P. and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils are conventionally employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil can be employed including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid are used in the preparation of injectables.

The injectable formulations can be sterilized, for example, by filtration through a bacterial-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved or dispersed in sterile water or other sterile injectable medium prior to use.

In order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is often desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This can be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material with poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.

Compositions for rectal or vaginal administration are typically suppositories which can be prepared by mixing the conjugates of this invention with suitable non-irritating excipients or carriers such as cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol or a suppository wax which are solid at ambient temperature but liquid at body temperature and therefore melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active ingredient.

Solid dosage forms for oral administration include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. In such solid dosage forms, the active ingredient is mixed with at least one inert, pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate and/or a) fillers or extenders such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and silicic acid, b) binders such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinylpyrrolidinone, sucrose, and acacia, c) humectants such as glycerol, d) disintegrating agents such as agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate, e) solution retarding agents such as paraffin, f) absorption accelerators such as quaternary ammonium compounds, g) wetting agents such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate, h) absorbents such as kaolin and bentonite clay, and i) lubricants such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage form may comprise buffering agents.

Solid compositions of a similar type can be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. They may optionally comprise opacifying agents and can be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. Solid compositions of a similar type can be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugar as well as high molecular weight polethylene glycols and the like.

The active ingredients can be in micro-encapsulated form with one or more excipients as noted above. The solid dosage forms of tablets, dragees, capsules, pills, and granules can be prepared with coatings and shells such as enteric coatings, release controlling coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical formulating art. In such solid dosage forms the active ingredient can be admixed with at least one inert diluent such as sucrose, lactose or starch. Such dosage forms may comprise, as is normal practice, additional substances other than inert diluents, e.g., tableting lubricants and other tableting aids such a magnesium stearate and microcrystalline cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the dosage forms may comprise buffering agents. They may optionally comprise opacifying agents and can be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain part of the intestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.

Dosage forms for topical and/or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention may include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants and/or patches. Generally, the active ingredient is admixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and/or any needed preservatives and/or buffers as can be required. Additionally, the present invention contemplates the use of transdermal patches, which often have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of an active ingredient to the body. Such dosage forms can be prepared, for example, by dissolving and/or dispensing the active ingredient in the proper medium. Alternatively or additionally, the rate can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane and/or by dispersing the active ingredient in a polymer matrix and/or gel.

Suitable devices for use in delivering intradermal pharmaceutical compositions described herein include short needle devices such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,886,499; 5,190,521; 5,328,483; 5,527,288; 4,270,537; 5,015,235; 5,141,496; and 5,417,662. Intradermal compositions can be administered by devices which limit the effective penetration length of a needle into the skin, such as those described in PCT publication WO 99/34850 and functional equivalents thereof. Jet injection devices which deliver liquid vaccines to the dermis via a liquid jet injector and/or via a needle which pierces the stratum corneum and produces a jet which reaches the dermis are suitable. Jet injection devices are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,480,381; 5,599,302; 5,334,144; 5,993,412; 5,649,912; 5,569,189; 5,704,911; 5,383,851; 5,893,397; 5,466,220; 5,339,163; 5,312,335; 5,503,627; 5,064,413; 5,520,639; 4,596,556; 4,790,824; 4,941,880; 4,940,460; and PCT publications WO 97/37705 and WO 97/13537. Ballistic powder/particle delivery devices which use compressed gas to accelerate vaccine in powder form through the outer layers of the skin to the dermis are suitable. Alternatively or additionally, conventional syringes can be used in the classical mantoux method of intradermal administration.

Formulations suitable for topical administration include, but are not limited to, liquid and/or semi liquid preparations such as liniments, lotions, oil in water and/or water in oil emulsions such as creams, ointments and/or pastes, and/or solutions and/or suspensions. Topically-administrable formulations may, for example, comprise from about 1% to about 10% (w/w) active ingredient, although the concentration of the active ingredient can be as high as the solubility limit of the active ingredient in the solvent. Formulations for topical administration may further comprise one or more of the additional ingredients described herein.

A pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be prepared, packaged, and/or sold in a formulation suitable for pulmonary administration via the buccal cavity. Such a formulation may comprise dry particles which comprise the active ingredient and which have a diameter in the range from about 0.5 to about 7 nanometers or from about 1 to about 6 nanometers. Such compositions are conveniently in the form of dry powders for administration using a device comprising a dry powder reservoir to which a stream of propellant can be directed to disperse the powder and/or using a self propelling solvent/powder dispensing container such as a device comprising the active ingredient dissolved and/or suspended in a low-boiling propellant in a sealed container. Such powders comprise particles wherein at least 98% of the particles by weight have a diameter greater than 0.5 nanometers and at least 95% of the particles by number have a diameter less than 7 nanometers. Alternatively, at least 95% of the particles by weight have a diameter greater than 1 nanometer and at least 90% of the particles by number have a diameter less than 6 nanometers. Dry powder compositions may include a solid fine powder diluent such as sugar and are conveniently provided in a unit dose form.

Low boiling propellants generally include liquid propellants having a boiling point of below 65° F. at atmospheric pressure. Generally the propellant may constitute 50 to 99.9% (w/w) of the composition, and the active ingredient may constitute 0.1 to 20% (w/w) of the composition. The propellant may further comprise additional ingredients such as a liquid non-ionic and/or solid anionic surfactant and/or a solid diluent (which may have a particle size of the same order as particles comprising the active ingredient).

Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention formulated for pulmonary delivery may provide the active ingredient in the form of droplets of a solution and/or suspension. Such formulations can be prepared, packaged, and/or sold as aqueous and/or dilute alcoholic solutions and/or suspensions, optionally sterile, comprising the active ingredient, and may conveniently be administered using any nebulization and/or atomization device. Such formulations may further comprise one or more additional ingredients including, but not limited to, a flavoring agent such as saccharin sodium, a volatile oil, a buffering agent, a surface active agent, and/or a preservative such as methylhydroxybenzoate. The droplets provided by this route of administration may have an average diameter in the range from about 0.1 to about 200 nanometers.

The formulations described herein as being useful for pulmonary delivery are useful for intranasal delivery of a pharmaceutical composition of the invention. Another formulation suitable for intranasal administration is a coarse powder comprising the active ingredient and having an average particle from about 0.2 to 500 micrometers. Such a formulation is administered. by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close to the nares.

Formulations suitable for nasal administration may, for example, comprise from about as little as 0.1% (w/w) and as much as 100% (w/w) of the active ingredient, and may comprise one or more of the additional ingredients described herein. A pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be prepared, packaged, and/or sold in a formulation suitable for buccal administration. Such formulations may, for example, be in the form of tablets and/or lozenges made using conventional methods, and may contain, for example, 0.1 to 20% (w/w) active ingredient, the balance comprising an orally dissolvable and/or degradable composition and, optionally, one or more of the additional ingredients described herein. Alternately, formulations suitable for buccal administration may comprise a powder and/or an aerosolized and/or atomized solution and/or suspension comprising the active ingredient. Such powdered, aerosolized, and/or aerosolized formulations, when dispersed, may have an average particle and/or droplet size in the range from about 0.1 to about 200 nanometers, and may further comprise one or more of the additional ingredients described herein.

A pharmaceutical composition of the invention can be prepared, packaged, and/or sold in a formulation suitable for ophthalmic administration. Such formulations may, for example, be in the form of eye drops including, for example, a 0.1/1.0% (w/w) solution and/or suspension of the active ingredient in an aqueous or oily liquid carrier. Such drops may further comprise buffering agents, salts, and/or one or more other of the additional ingredients described herein. Other opthalmically-administrable formulations which are useful include those which comprise the active ingredient in microcrystalline form and/or in a liposomal preparation. Ear drops and/or eye drops are contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.

Although the descriptions of pharmaceutical compositions provided herein are principally directed to pharmaceutical compositions which are suitable for administration to humans, it will be understood by the skilled artisan that such compositions are generally suitable for administration to animals of all sorts. Modification of pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration to humans in order to render the compositions suitable for administration to various animals is well understood, and the ordinarily skilled veterinary pharmacologist can design and/or perform such modification with ordinary experimentation. General considerations in the formulation and/or manufacture of pharmaceutical compositions can be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy 21^(st) ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.

Still further encompassed by the invention are pharmaceutical packs and/or kits. Pharmaceutical packs and/or kits provided may comprise a provided composition and a container (e.g., a vial, ampoule, bottle, syringe, and/or dispenser package, or other suitable container). In some embodiments, provided kits may optionally further include a second container comprising a suitable aqueous carrier for dilution or suspension of the provided composition for preparation of administration to a subject. In some embodiments, contents of provided formulation container and solvent container combine to form at least one unit dosage form.

In some embodiments, a provided composition of the invention can be useful in conjunction with subject controlled analgesia (PCA) devices, wherein a subject can administer, for example, opioid analgesia as required for pain management.

Optionally, a single container may comprise one or more compartments for containing a provided composition, and/or appropriate aqueous carrier for suspension or dilution. In some embodiments, a single container can be appropriate for modification such that the container may receive a physical modification so as to allow combination of compartments and/or components of individual compartments. For example, a foil or plastic bag may comprise two or more compartments separated by a perforated seal which can be broken so as to allow combination of contents of two individual compartments once the signal to break the seal is generated. A pharmaceutical pack or kit may thus comprise such multi-compartment containers including a provided composition and appropriate solvent and/or appropriate aqueous carrier for suspension.

Optionally, instructions for use are additionally provided in such kits of the invention. Such instructions may provide, generally, for example, instructions for dosage and administration. In other embodiments, instructions may further provide additional detail relating to specialized instructions for particular containers and/or systems for administration. Still further, instructions may provide specialized instructions for use in conjunction and/or in combination with additional therapy. In one non-limiting example, the formulations of the invention can be used in conjunction with opioid analgesia administration, which may, optionally, comprise use of a subject controlled analgesia (PCA) device. Thus, instructions for use of provided formulations may comprise instructions for use in conjunction with PCA administration devices.

III. Methods of Use and Treatment

The present invention provides methods for treating a FAAH-mediated condition comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof.

The present invention also provides methods for inhibiting FAAH in a subject comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof.

The present invention also provides a method of inhibiting activation of the FAAH pathway in vitro or ex vivo, comprising contacting a FAAH protein with a compound of formula (I) in an amount sufficient to reduce the activation of the FAAH pathway.

The present invention also provides use of a compound of formula (I) for the treatment of a FAAH-mediated condition in a subject.

The present invention also provides use of a compound of formula (I) in the manufacture of a medicament. In certain embodiments, the medicament is useful for treating a FAAH-mediated condition.

A “subject” to which administration is contemplated includes, but is not limited to, humans (i.e., a male or female of any age group, e.g., a pediatric subject (e.g, infant, child, adolescent) or adult subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult or senior adult)) and/or other primates (e.g., cynomolgus monkeys, rhesus monkeys); mammals, including commercially relevant mammals such as cattle, pigs, horses, sheep, goats, cats, and/or dogs; and/or birds, including commercially relevant birds such as chickens, ducks, geese, and/or turkeys.

As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, the terms “treat,” “treating” and “treatment” contemplate an action that occurs while a subject is suffering from the specified disease, disorder or condition, which reduces the severity of the disease, disorder or condition, or retards or slows the progression of the disease, disorder or condition.

As used herein, unless otherwise specified, the terms “prevent,” “preventing” and “prevention” contemplate an action that occurs before a subject begins to suffer from the specified disease, disorder or condition, which inhibits or reduces the severity of the disease, disorder or condition.

As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, the terms “manage,” “managing” and “management” encompass preventing the recurrence of the specified disease, disorder or condition in a subject who has already suffered from the disease, disorder or condition, and/or lengthening the time that a subject who has suffered from the disease, disorder or condition remains in remission. The terms encompass modulating the threshold, development and/or duration of the disease, disorder or condition, or changing the way that a subject responds to the disease, disorder or condition.

As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, a “therapeutically effective amount” of a compound is an amount sufficient to provide a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of a disease, disorder or condition, or to delay or minimize one or more symptoms associated with the disease, disorder or condition. A therapeutically effective amount of a compound means an amount of therapeutic agent, alone or in combination with other therapies, which provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of the disease, disorder or condition. The term “therapeutically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease or condition, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of another therapeutic agent.

As used herein, and unless otherwise specified, a “prophylactically effective amount” of a compound is an amount sufficient to prevent a disease, disorder or condition, or one or more symptoms associated with the disease, disorder or condition, or prevent its recurrence. A prophylactically effective amount of a compound means an amount of therapeutic agent, alone or in combination with other agents, which provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease, disorder or condition. The term “prophylactically effective amount” can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of another prophylactic agent.

As used herein “inhibition”, “inhibiting”, “inhibit” and “inhibitor”, and the like, refer to the ability of a compound to reduce, slow, halt or prevent activity of a particular biological process (e.g., FAAH activity) in a cell relative to vehicle.

“FAAH-mediated condition” as used herein, refers to a disease, disorder or condition which is treatable by inhibition of FAAH activity. “Disease”, “disorder” or “condition” are terms used interchangeably herein. FAAH-mediated conditions include, but are not limited to, painful conditions, inflammatory conditions, immune disorders, disorders of the central nervous system, metabolic disorders, cardiac disorders and glaucoma.

In certain embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is a painful condition. As used herein, a “painful condition” includes, but is not limited to, neuropathic pain (e.g., peripheral neuropathic pain), central pain, deafferentiation pain, chronic pain (e.g., chronic nociceptive pain, and other forms of chronic pain such as post-operative pain, e.g., pain arising after hip, knee, or other replacement surgery), pre-operative pain, stimulus of nociceptive receptors (nociceptive pain), acute pain (e.g., phantom and transient acute pain), non-inflammatory pain, inflammatory pain, pain associated with cancer, wound pain, burn pain, post-operative pain, pain associated with medical procedures, pain resulting from pruritus, painful bladder syndrome, pain associated with premenstrual dysphoric disorder and/or premenstrual syndrome, pain associated with chronic fatigue syndrome, pain associated with pre-term labor, pain associated with drawl symptoms from drug addiction, joint pain, arthritic pain (e.g., pain associated with crystalline arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis, gouty arthritis, reactive arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis or Reiter's arthritis), lumbosacral pain, musculo-skeletal pain, headache, migraine, muscle ache, lower back pain, neck pain, toothache, dental/maxillofacial pain, visceral pain and the like.

One or more of the painful conditions contemplated herein can comprise mixtures of various types of pain provided above and herein (e.g. nociceptive pain, inflammatory pain, neuropathic pain, etc.). In some embodiments, a particular pain can dominate. In other embodiments, the painful condition comprises two or more types of pains without one dominating. A skilled clinician can determine the dosage to achieve a therapeutically effective amount for a particular subject based on the painful condition.

In certain embodiments, the painful condition is neuropathic pain. The term “neuropathic pain” refers to pain resulting from injury to a nerve. Neuropathic pain is distinguished from nociceptive pain, which is the pain caused by acute tissue injury involving small cutaneous nerves or small nerves in muscle or connective tissue. Neuropathic pain typically is long-lasting or chronic and often develops days or months following an initial acute tissue injury. Neuropathic pain can involve persistent, spontaneous pain as well as allodynia, which is a painful response to a stimulus that normally is not painful. Neuropathic pain also can be characterized by hyperalgesia, in which there is an accentuated response to a painful stimulus that usually is trivial, such as a pin prick. Neuropathic pain conditions can develop following neuronal injury and the resulting pain may persist for months or years, even after the original injury has healed. Neuronal injury may occur in the peripheral nerves, dorsal roots, spinal cord or certain regions in the brain. Neuropathic pain conditions include, but are not limited to, diabetic neuropathy (e.g., peripheral diabetic neuropathy); sciatica; non-specific lower back pain; multiple sclerosis pain; carpal tunnel syndrome, fibromyalgia; HIV-related neuropathy; neuralgia (e.g., post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia); pain resulting from physical trauma (e.g., amputation; surgery, invasive medical procedures, toxins, burns, infection), pain resulting from cancer or chemotherapy (e.g., chemotherapy-induced pain such as chemotherapy-induced peripheral neuropathy), and pain resulting from an inflammatory condition (e.g., a chronic inflammatory condition). Neuropathic pain can result from a peripheral nerve disorder such as neuroma; nerve compression; nerve crush, nerve stretch or incomplete nerve transsection; mononeuropathy or polyneuropathy. Neuropathic pain can also result from a disorder such as dorsal root ganglion compression; inflammation of the spinal cord; contusion, tumor or hemisection of the spinal cord; tumors of the brainstem, thalamus or cortex; or trauma to the brainstem, thalamus or cortex.

The symptoms of neuropathic pain are heterogeneous and are often described as spontaneous shooting and lancinating pain, or ongoing, burning pain. In addition, there is pain associated with normally non-painful sensations such as “pins and needles” (paraesthesias and dysesthesias), increased sensitivity to touch (hyperesthesia), painful sensation following innocuous stimulation (dynamic, static or thermal allodynia), increased sensitivity to noxious stimuli (thermal, cold, mechanical hyperalgesia), continuing pain sensation after removal of the stimulation (hyperpathia) or an absence of or deficit in selective sensory pathways (hypoalgesia).

In certain embodiments, the painful condition is non-inflammatory pain. The types of non-inflammatory pain include, without limitation, peripheral neuropathic pain (e.g., pain caused by a lesion or dysfunction in the peripheral nervous system), central pain (e.g., pain caused by a lesion or dysfunction of the central nervous system), deafferentation pain (e.g., pain due toloss of sensory input to the central nervous system), chronic nociceptive pain (e.g., certain types of cancer pain), noxious stimulus of nociceptive receptors (e.g., pain felt in response to tissue damage or impending tissue damage), phantom pain (e.g., pain felt in a part of the body that nolonger exists, such as a limb that has been amputated), pain felt by psychiatric subjects (e.g., pain where no physical cause may exist), and wandering pain (e.g., wherein the pain repeatedly changes location in the body).

In certain embodiments, the painful condition is inflammatory pain. In certain embodiments, the painful condition (e.g., inflammatory pain) is associated with an inflammatory condition and/or an immune disorder.

In certain embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is an inflammatory condition. The term “inflammatory condition” refers to those diseases, disorders or conditions that are characterized by signs of pain (dolor, from the generation of noxious substances and the stimulation of nerves), heat (calor, from vasodilatation), redness (rubor, from vasodilatation and increased blood flow), swelling (tumor, from excessive inflow or restricted outflow of fluid), and/or loss of function (functio laesa, which can be partial or complete, temporary or permanent. Inflammation takes on many forms and includes, but is not limited to, acute, adhesive, atrophic, catarrhal, chronic, cirrhotic, diffuse, disseminated, exudative, fibrinous, fibrosing, focal, granulomatous, hyperplastic, hypertrophic, interstitial, metastatic, necrotic, obliterative, parenchymatous, plastic, productive, proliferous, pseudomembranous, purulent, sclerosing, seroplastic, serous, simple, specific, subacute, suppurative, toxic, traumatic, and/or ulcerative inflammation.

Exemplary inflammatory conditions include, but are not limited to, inflammation associated with acne, anemia (e.g., aplastic anemia, haemolytic autoimmune anaemia), asthma, arteritis (e.g., polyarteritis, temporal arteritis, periarteritis nodosa, Takayasu's arteritis), arthritis (e.g., crystalline arthritis, osteoarthritis, psoriatic arthritis, gouty arthritis, reactive arthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and Reiter's arthritis), ankylosing spondylitis, amylosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, autoimmune diseases, allergies or allergic reactions, atherosclerosis, bronchitis, bursitis, chronic prostatitis, conjunctivitis, Chagas disease, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, cermatomyositis, diverticulitis, diabetes (e.g., type I diabetes mellitus, type 2 diabetes mellitus), a skin condition (e.g., psoriasis, eczema, burns, dermatitis, pruritus (itch)), endometriosis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, infection, ischaemic heart disease, Kawasaki disease, glomerulonephritis, gingivitis, hypersensitivity, headaches (e.g., migraine headaches, tension headaches), ileus (e.g., postoperative ileus and ileus during sepsis), idiopathic thrombocytopenic purpura, interstitial cystitis (painful bladder syndrome), gastrointestinal disorder (e.g., selected from peptic ulcers, regional enteritis, diverticulitis, gastrointestinal bleeding, eosinophilic gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., eosinophilic esophagitis, eosinophilic gastritis, eosinophilic gastroenteritis, eosinophilic colitis), gastritis, diarrhea, gastroesophageal reflux disease (GORD, or its synonym GERD), inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) (e.g., Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, collagenous colitis, lymphocytic colitis, ischaemic colitis, diversion colitis Behcet's syndrome, indeterminate colitis) and inflammatory bowel syndrome (IBS)), lupus, multiple sclerosis, morphea, myeasthenia gravis, myocardial ischemia, nephrotic syndrome, pemphigus vulgaris, pernicious aneaemia, peptic ulcers, polymyositis, primary biliary cirrhosis, neuroinflammation associated with brain disorders (e.g., Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, and Alzheimer's disease), prostatitis, chronic inflammation associated with cranial radiation injury, pelvic inflammatory disease, reperfusion injury, regional enteritis, rheumatic fever, systemic lupus erythematosus, schleroderma, scierodoma, sarcoidosis, spondyloarthopathies, Sjogren's syndrome, thyroiditis, transplantation rejection, tendonitis, trauma or injury (e.g., frostbite, chemical irritants, toxins, scarring, burns, physical injury), vasculitis, vitiligo and Wegener's granulomatosis. In certain embodiments, the inflammatory disorder is selected from arthritis (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis), inflammatory bowel disease, inflammatory bowel syndrome, asthma, psoriasis, endometriosis, interstitial cystitis and prostatistis. In certain embodiments, the inflammatory condition is an acute inflammatory condition (e.g., for example, inflammation resulting from infection). In certain embodiments, the inflammatory condition is a chronic inflammatory condition (e.g., conditions resulting from asthma, arthritis and inflammatory bowel disease). The compounds may also be useful in treating inflammation associated with trauma and non-inflammatory myalgia. The compounds may also be useful in treating inflammation associated with cancer.

In certain embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is an immune disorder. Immune disorders, such as auto-immune disorders, include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including rheumatoid arthritis, spondyloarthopathies, gouty arthritis, degenerative joint diseases such as osteoarthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Sjogren's syndrome, ankylosing spondylitis, undifferentiated spondylitis, Behcet's disease, haemolytic autoimmune anaemias, multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, amylosis, acute painful shoulder, psoriatic, and juvenile arthritis), asthma, atherosclerosis, osteoporosis, bronchitis, tendonitis, bursitis, skin condition (e.g., psoriasis, eczema, burns, dermatitis, pruritus (itch)), enuresis, eosinophilic disease, gastrointestinal disorder (e.g., selected from peptic ulcers, regional enteritis, diverticulitis, gastrontestinal bleeding, eosinophilic gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., eosinophilic esophagitis, eosinophilic gastritis, eosinophilic gastroenteritis, eosinophilic colitis), gastritis, diarrhea, gastroesophageal reflux disease (GORD, or its synonym GERD), inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) (e.g., Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, collagenous colitis, lymphocytic colitis, ischaemic colitis, diversion colitis, Behcet's syndrome, indeterminate colitis) and inflammatory bowel syndrome (IBS)), and disorders ameliorated by a gastroprokinetic agent (e.g., ileus, postoperative ileus and ileus during sepsis; gastroesophageal reflux disease (GORD, or its synonym GERD); eosinophilic esophagitis, gastroparesis such as diabetic gastroparesis; food intolerances and food allergies and other functional bowel disorders, such as non-ulcerative dyspepsia (NUD) and non-cardiac chest pain (NCCP, including costo-chondritis)).

In certain embodiments, the inflammatory disorder and/or the immune disorder is a gastrointestinal disorder. In some embodiments, the gastrointestinal disorder is selected from gastrointestinal disorder (e.g., selected from peptic ulcers, regional enteritis, diverticulitis, gastrointestinal bleeding, eosinophilic gastrointestinal disorders (e.g., eosinophilic esophagitis, eosinophilic gastritis, eosinophilic gastroenteritis, eosinophilic colitis), gastritis, diarrhea, gastroesophageal reflux disease (GORD, or its synonym GERD), inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) (e.g., Crohn's disease, ulcerative colitis, collagenous colitis, lymphocytic colitis, ischaemic colitis, diversion colitis, Behcet's syndrome, indeterminate colitis) and inflammatory bowel syndrome (IBS)). In certain embodiments, the gastrointestinal disorder is inflammatory bowel disease (IBD).

In certain embodiments, the inflammatory condition and/or immune disorder is a skin condition. In some embodiments, the skin condition is pruritus (itch), psoriasis, eczema, burns or dermatitis. In certain embodiments, the skin condition is psoriasis. In certain embodiments, the skin condition is pruritis.

In certain embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is a disorder of the central nervous system (CNS) (“CNS disorder”). Exemplary CNS disorders include, but are not limited to, neurotoxicity and/or neurotrauma, stroke, multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, epilepsy, a mental disorder, a sleep condition, a movement disorder, nausea and/or emesis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease and drug addiction.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is neurotoxicity and/or neurotrauma, e.g., for example, as a result of acute neuronal injury (e.g., tramatic brain injury (TBI), stroke, epilepsy) or a chronic neurodegenerative disorder (e.g., multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease). In certain embodiments, the compound of the present invention provides a neuroprotective effect, e.g., against an acute neuronal injury or a chronic neurodegenerative disorder.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is stroke (e.g., ischemic stroke).

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is multiple sclerosis.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is spinal cord injury.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is epilepsy.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is a mental disorder, e.g., for example, depression, anxiety or anxiety-related conditions, a learning disability or schizophrenia.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is depression. “Depression,” as used herein, includes, but is not limited to, depressive disorders or conditions, such as, for example, major depressive disorders (e.g., unipolar depression), dysthymic disorders (e.g., chronic, mild depression), bipolar disorders (e.g., manic-depression), seasonal affective disorder, and/or depression associated with drug addiction (e.g., withdrawal). The depression can be clinical or subclinical depression. The depression can be associated with or prementrual syndrome and/or premenstrual dysphoric disorder.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is anxiety. “Anxiety,” as used herein, includes, but is not limited to anxiety and anxiety-related conditions, such as, for example, clinical anxiety, panic disorder, agoraphobia, generalized anxiety disorder, specific phobia, social phobia, obsessive-compulsive disorder, acute stress disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder, adjustment disorders with anxious features, anxiety disorder associated with depression, anxiety disorder due to general medical conditions, and substance-induced anxiety disorders, anxiety associated with drug addiction (e.g., withdrawal, dependence, reinstatement) and anxiety associated with nausea and/or emesis. This treatment may also be to induce or promote sleep in a subject (e.g., for example, a subject with anxiety).

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is a learning disorder (e.g., attention deficit disorder (ADD)).

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is Schizophrenia.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is a sleep condition. “Sleep conditions” include, but are not limited to, insomia, narcolepsy, sleep apnea, restless legs syndrome (RLS), delayed sleep phase syndrome (DSPS), periodic limb movement disorder (PLMD), hypopnea syndrome, rapid eye movement behavior disorder (RBD), shift work sleep condition (SWSD), and sleep problems (e.g., parasomnias) such as nightmares, night terrors, sleep talking, head banging, snoring, and clenched jaw and/or grinding of teeth (bruxism).

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is a movement disorder, e.g., basal ganglia disorders, such as, for example, Parkinson's disease, levodopa-induced dyskinesia, Huntington's disease, Gilles de la Tourette's syndrome, tardive diskinesia and dystonia.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is Alzheimer's disease.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS).

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is nausea and/or emesis.

In certain embodiments, the CNS disorder is drug addiction (e.g., for instance, addiction to opiates, nicotine, cocaine, psychostimulants or alcohol).

In still yet other embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is a cardiac disorder, e.g., for example, selected from hypertension, circulatory shock, myocardial reperfusion injury and atherosclerosis.

In certain embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is a metabolic disorder (e.g., a wasting condition, an obesity-related condition or complication thereof).

In certain embodiments, the metabolic disorder is a wasting condition. A “wasting condition,” as used herein, includes but is not limited to, anorexia and cachexias of various natures (e.g., weight loss associated with cancer, weight loss associated with other general medical conditions, weight loss associated with failure to thrive, and the like).

In certain embodiments, the metabolic disorder is an obesity-related condition or a complication thereof. An “obesity-related condition” as used herein, includes, but is not limited to, obesity, undesired weight gain (e.g., from medication-induced weight gain, from cessation of smoking) and an over-eating disorder (e.g., binge eating, bulimia, compulsive eating, or a lack of appetite control each of which can optionally lead to undesired weight gain or obesity). “Obesity” and “obese” as used herein, refers to class I obesity, class II obesity, class III obesity and pre-obesity (e.g., being “over-weight”) as defined by the World Health Organization.

Reduction of storage fat is expected to provide various primary and/or secondary benefits in a subject (e.g., in a subject diagnosed with a complication associated with obesity) such as, for example, an increased insulin responsiveness (e.g., in a subject diagnosed with Type II diabetes mellitus); a reduction in elevated blood pressure; a reduction in elevated cholesterol levels; and/or a reduction (or a reduced risk or progression) of ischemic heart disease, arterial vascular disease, angina, myocardial infarction, stroke, migraines, congestive heart failure, deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, gall stones, gastroesophagael reflux disease, obstructive sleep apnea, obesity hypoventilation syndrome, asthma, gout, poor mobility, back pain, erectile dysfunction, urinary incontinence, liver injury (e.g., fatty liver disease, liver cirrhosis, alcoholic cirrhosis, endotoxin mediated liver injury) or chronic renal failure. Thus, the method of this invention is applicable to obese subjects, diabetic subjects, and alcoholic subjects.

In some embodiments, treatment of an obesity-related condition or complication thereof involves reduction of body weight in the subject. In some embodiments, treatment of an obesity-related condition or complication thereof involves appetite control in the subject.

In other embodiments, the FAAH-mediated condition is glaucoma.

IV. Administration

Provided compounds can be administered using any amount and any route of administration effective for treatment. The exact amount required will vary from subject to subject, depending on the species, age, and general condition of the subject, the severity of the infection, the particular composition, its mode of administration, its mode of activity, and the like.

Compounds provided herein are typically formulated in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. It will be understood, however, that the total daily usage of the compositions of the present invention will be decided by the attending physician within the scope of sound medical judgment. The specific therapeutically effective dose level for any particular subject or organism will depend upon a variety of factors including the disease, disorder, or condition being treated and the severity of the disorder; the activity of the specific active ingredient employed; the specific composition employed; the age, body weight, general health, sex and diet of the subject; the time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion of the specific active ingredient employed; the duration of the treatment; drugs used in combination or coincidental with the specific active ingredient employed; and like factors well known in the medical arts.

The compounds and compositions provided herein can be administered by any route, including oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, subcutaneous, intraventricular, transdermal, interdermal, rectal, intravaginal, intraperitoneal, topical (as by powders, ointments, creams, and/or drops), mucosal, nasal, bucal, enteral, sublingual; by intratracheal instillation, bronchial instillation, and/or inhalation; and/or as an oral spray, nasal spray, and/or aerosol. Specifically contemplated routes are systemic intravenous injection, regional administration via blood and/or lymph supply, and/or direct administration to an affected site. In general the most appropriate route of administration will depend upon a variety of factors including the nature of the agent (e.g., its stability in the environment of the gastrointestinal tract), the condition of the subject (e.g., whether the subject is able to tolerate oral administration), etc.

The exact amount of a compound required to achieve a therapeutically effective amount will vary from subject to subject, depending, for example, on species, age, and general condition of a subject, severity of the side effects or disorder, identity of the particular compound(s), mode of administration, and the like. The desired dosage can be delivered three times a day, two times a day, once a day, every other day, every third day, every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, or every four weeks. In certain embodiments, the desired dosage can be delivered using multiple administrations (e.g., two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, or more administrations).

In certain embodiments, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound for administration one or more times a day to a 70 kg adult human may comprise about 0.0001 mg to about 3000 mg, about 0.0001 mg to about 2000 mg, about 0.0001 mg to about 1000 mg, about 0.001 mg to about 1000 mg, about 0.01 mg to about 1000 mg, about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg, about 1 mg to about 1000 mg, about 1 mg to about 100 mg, about 10 mg to about 1000 mg, or about 100 mg to about 1000 mg, of an inventive compound per unit dosage form. It will be appreciated that dose ranges as described herein provide guidance for the administration of provided pharmaceutical compositions to an adult. The amount to be administered to, for example, a child or an adolescent can be determined by a medical practitioner or person skilled in the art and can be lower or the same as that administered to an adult.

It will be also appreciated that a compound or composition, as described herein, can be administered in combination with one or more additional therapeutically active agents. The compound or composition can be administered concurrently with, prior to, or subsequent to, one or more additional therapeutically active agents. In general, each agent will be administered at a dose and/or on a time schedule determined for that agent. In will further be appreciated that the additional therapeutically active agent utilized in this combination can be administered together in a single composition or administered separately in different compositions. The particular combination to employ in a regimen will take into account compatibility of the inventive compound with the additional therapeutically active agent and/or the desired therapeutic effect to be achieved. In general, it is expected that additional therapeutically active agents utilized in combination be utilized at levels that do not exceed the levels at which they are utilized individually. In some embodiments, the levels utilized in combination will be lower than those utilized individually.

The compounds or compositions can be administered in combination with agents that improve their bioavailability, reduce and/or modify their metabolism, inhibit their excretion, and/or modify their distribution within the body. It will also be appreciated that therapy employed may achieve a desired effect for the same disorder (for example, a compound can be administered in combination with an anti-inflammatory, anti-anxiety and/or anti-depressive agent, etc.), and/or it may achieve different effects (e.g., control of adverse side-effects).

Exemplary active agents include, but are not limited to, anti-cancer agents, antibiotics, anti-viral agents, anesthetics, anti-coagulants, inhibitors of an enzyme, steroidal agents, steroidal or non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents, antihistamine, immunosuppressant agents, anti-neoplastic agents, antigens, vaccines, antibodies, decongestant,s sedatives, opioids, pain-relieving agents, analgesics, anti-pyretics, hormones, prostaglandins, progestational agents, anti-glaucoma agents, ophthalmic agents, anti-cholinergics, anti-depressants, anti-psychotics, hypnotics, tranquilizers, anti-convulsants/anti-epileptics (e.g., Neurontin, Lyrica, valproates (e.g., Depacon), and other neurostabilizing agents), muscle relaxants, anti-spasmodics, muscle contractants, channel blockers, miotic agents, anti-secretory agents, anti-thrombotic agents, anticoagulants, anti-cholinergics, β-adrenergic blocking agents, diuretics, cardiovascular active agents, vasoactive agents, vasodilating agents, anti-hypertensive agents, angiogenic agents, modulators of cell-extracellular matrix interactions (e.g. cell growth inhibitors and anti-adhesion molecules), or inhibitors/intercalators of DNA, RNA, protein-protein interactions, protein-receptor interactions, etc. Active agents include small organic molecules such as drug compounds (e.g., compounds approved by the Food and Drugs Administration as provided in the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)), peptides, proteins, carbohydrates, monosaccharides, oligosaccharides, polysaccharides, nucleoproteins, mucoproteins, lipoproteins, synthetic polypeptides or proteins, small molecules linked to proteins, glycoproteins, steroids, nucleic acids, DNAs, RNAs, nucleotides, nucleosides, oligonucleotides, antisense oligonucleotides, lipids, hormones, vitamins and cells.

In certain embodiments, the additional therapeutically active agent is a pain-relieving agent. Exemplary pain relieving agents include, but are not limited to, analgesics such as non-narcotic analgesics [e.g., salicylates such as aspirin, ibuprofen (MOTRIN®, ADVIL®), ketoprofen (ORUDIS®), naproxen (NAPROSYN®), acetaminophen, indomethacin] or narcotic analgesics [e.g., opioid analgesics such as tramadol, fentenyl, sufentanil, morphine, hydromorphone, codeine, oxycodone, and buprenorphine]; non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (NSAIDs) [e.g., aspirin, acetaminophen, COX-2 inhibitors]; steroids or anti-rheumatic agents; migraine preparations such as beta adrenergic blocking agents, ergot derivatives; tricyclic antidepressants (e.g., amitryptyline, desipramine, imipramine); anti-epileptics (e.g., clonaxepam, valproic acid, phenobarbital, phenyloin, tiagaine, gabapentin, carbamazepine, topiramate, sodium valproate); α₂ agonists; selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), selective norepinepherine uptake inhibitors; benzodiazepines; mexiletine (MEXITIL); flecamide (TAMBOCOR); NMDA receptor antagonists [e.g., ketamine, detromethorphan, methadone]; and topical agents [e.g., capsaicin (Zostrix), EMLA cream, lidocaine, prilocalne].

In other embodiments, the additional therapeutically active agent is an anti-inflammatory agent. Exemplary anti-inflammatory agents include, but are not limited to, aspirin; ibuprofen; ketoprofen; naproxen; etodolac (LODINE®); COX-2 inhibitors such as celecoxib (CELEBREX®), rofecoxib (VIOXX®), valdecoxib (BEXTRA®), parecoxib, etoricoxib (MK663), deracoxib, 2-(4-ethoxy-phenyl)-3-(4-methanesulfonyl-phenyl)-pyrazolo[1,5-b]pyridazine, 4-(2-oxo-3-phenyl-2,3-dihydrooxazol-4-yl)benzenesulfonamide, darbufelone, flosulide, 4-(4-cyclohexyl-2-methyl-5-oxazolyl)-2-fluorobenzenesulfonamide), meloxicam, nimesulide, 1-Methylsulfonyl-4-(1,1-dimethyl-4-(4-fluorophenyl)cyclopenta-2,4-dien-3-yl)benzene, 4-(1,5-Dihydro-6-fluoro-7-methoxy-3-(trifluoromethyl)-(2)-benzothiopyrano(4,3-c)pyrazol-1-yl)benzenesulfonamide, 4,4-dimethyl-2-phenyl-3-(4-methylsulfonyl)phenyl)cyclo-butenone, 4-Amino-N-(4-(2-fluoro-5-trifluoromethyl)-thiazol-2-yl)-benzene sulfonamide, 1-(7-tert-butyl-2,3-dihydro-3,3-dimethyl-5-benzo-furanyl)-4-cyclopropyl butan-1-one, or their physiologically acceptable salts, esters or solvates; sulindac (CLINORIL®); diclofenac (VOLTAREN®); piroxicam (FELDENE®); diflunisal (DOLOBID®), nabumetone (RELAFEN®), oxaprozin (DAYPRO®), indomethacin (INDOCIN®); or steroids such as PEDIAPED® prednisolone sodium phosphate oral solution, SOLU-MEDROL® methylprednisolone sodium succinate for injection, PRELONE® brand prednisolone syrup.

Further examples of anti-inflammatory agents include naproxen, which is commercially available in the form of EC-NAPROSYN® delayed release tablets, NAPROSYN®, ANAPROX® and ANAPROX® DS tablets and NAPROSYN® suspension from Roche Labs, CELEBREX® brand of celecoxib tablets, VIOXX® brand of rofecoxib, CELESTONE® brand of betamethasone, CUPRAMINE® brand penicillamine capsules, DEPEN® brand titratable penicillamine tablets, DEPO-MEDROL brand of methylprednisolone acetate injectable suspension, ARAVA™ leflunomide tablets, AZULFIDIINE EN-tabs® brand of sulfasalazine delayed release tablets, FELDENE® brand piroxicam capsules, CATAFLAM® diclofenac potassium tablets, VOLTAREN® diclofenac sodium delayed release tablets, VOLTAREN®-XR diclofenac sodium extended release tablets, or ENBREL® etanerecept products.

V. Methods of Determining Biological Activity

Methods of determining the activity of the compounds provided herein for various therapeutic uses are known in the art. These include, but are not limited to, high throughput screening to identify compounds that bind to and/or modulate the activity of isolated FAAH, as well as in vitro and in vivo models of therapies.

Assays useful for screening the compounds provided herein may detect the binding of the inhibitor to FAAH or the release of a reaction product (e.g., fatty acid amide or ethanolamine) produced by the hydrolysis of a substrate such as oleoylethanolamide or ananadamide. The substrate can be labeled to facilitate detection of the released reaction products. U.S. Pat. No. 5,559,410 discloses high throughput screening methods for proteins, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,576,220 and 5,541,061 disclose high throughput methods of screening for ligand/antibody binding.

Methods for screening FAAH inhibitors for an antinociceptive effect are known in the art. For example, compounds can tested in the mouse hot-plate test and the mouse formalin test, and the nociceptive reactions to thermal or chemical tissue damage measured (for example, see U.S. Pat. No. 6,326,156 for a description of methods of screening for antinociceptive activity; see also Cravatt et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. (2001) 98:9371-9376).

Two pharmacologically validated animal models of anxiety are the elevated zero maze test, and the isolation-induced ultrasonic emission test. The zero maze consists of an elevated annular platform with two open and two closed quadrants and is based on the conflict between an animal's instinct to explore its environment and its fear of open spaces (see, for example, Bickerdike, M. J. et al., Eur. J. Pharmacol., (994) 271, 403-411; Shepherd, J. K. et al., Psychopharmacology, (1994) 116, 56-64). Clinically used anxiolytic drugs, such as the benzodiazepines, increase the proportion of time spent in, and the number of entries made into, the open compartments.

A second test for an anti-anxiety compound is the ultrasonic vocalization emission model, which measures the number of stress-induced vocalizations emitted by rat pups removed from their nest (see, for example, Insel, T. R. et al., Pharmacol. Biochem. Behav., 24, 1263-1267 (1986); Miczek, K. A. et al., Psychopharmacology, 121, 38-56 (1995); Winslow, J. T. et al., Biol. Psychiatry, 15, 745-757 (1991).

The effect of the compounds provided herein in the treatment of depression can be tested in the model of chronic mild stress induced anhedonia in rats. This model is based on the observation that chronic mild stress causes a gradual decrease in sensitivity to rewards, for example consumption of sucrose, and that this decrease is dose-dependently reversed by chronic treatment with antidepressants. See, e.g., Willner, Paul, Psychopharmacology, 1997, 134, 319-329.

Another test for antidepressant activity is the forced swimming test (Nature 266, 730-732, 1977). In this test, animals are administered an agent 30 or 60 minutes before being placed in container of water, and the time during which they remain immobile is recorded. A decrease in the immobility time of the mice is indicative of antidepressant activity.

A similar test for antidepressant activity is the mouse caudal suspension test (Psychopharmacology, 85, 367-370, 1985). In this test, animals are administered an agent 30 or 60 minutes before being suspended by the tail, and their immobility time is recorded. A decrease in the immobility time of the mice is indicative of antidepressant activity.

Animal models are available for assessing anticonvulsant activity of test compounds (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,309,406 and 6,326,156).

Inhibition of FAAH has been reported to induce sleep in test animals (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,096,784). Methods for studying sleep inducing compounds are known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,096,784 and 6,271,015). Compounds can be administered to a test animal (e.g., rat or mouse) or a human and the subsequent time (e.g., onset, duration) spent sleeping (e.g., eyes closed, motor quiescence) can be monitored. See also WO 98/24396.

Methods for screening FAAH inhibitors which induce catalepsy are also well known in the art (see, e.g., Quistand et al. in Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology 173: 48-55 (2001); Cravatt et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 98:9371-9376 (2001)).

Methods of assessing appetitive behavior are known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,344,474). One method of assessing the effect on appetite behavior is to administer a FAAH inhibitor to a rat and assess its effect on the intake of a sucrose solution (see, e.g., W. C. Lynch et al., Physiol. Behav., 1993, 54, 877-880).

Two pharmacologically validated animal models of neuropathic pain are the rat spinal nerve ligation model (Chung model) and a rat model of chemotherapy-induced neuropathic pain. After establishing neuropathy in these models, as a measure of mechanical allodynia, paw withdrawal thresholds were measured by stimulation with von Frey filaments (see, for example, Kim S H and Chung J M, Pain (1992) 50, 355-63; Nozaki-Taguchi N, et al., Pain (2001) 93, 69-76). Clinically used neuropathic pain drugs, such as the Gabapentin (Neurontin), increase the paw withdrawal threshold from stimulation with von Frey filaments.

Two pharmacologically validated animal models of inflammatory and mechanical pain are a joint compression model in rats treated with adjuvant or agents that produce joint degeneration. Treatment with clinically used anti-inflammatory agents such as naproxen increases the threshold of behavioral response to joint compression (see, for example, Wilson A W, et al., Eur. J. Pain (2006) 10, 537-49; Ivanavicius S A, et al., Pain (2007) 128, 272-282).

A pharmacologically validated animal models of cancer pain is mouse model where implantation in the calcaneus bone of fibrosarcoma cells produces paw hyperalgesia. Treatment with clinically used analgesics agents such as morphine increases the threshold of behavioral response to mechanical algesia (see, for example, Khasabova, et al., J. Neurscience (2008) 28, 11141-52).

EXEMPLIFICATION

The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.

General Synthetic Methods

Method 1

General conditions for the preparation of 3-bromo-isoxazolines: Alkene (1.2 equiv) and potassium hydrogen carbonate (2.5 equiv) are suspended in ethyl acetate (0.40 M with respect to alkene). N,N-Dibromoformaldoxime (1.0 equiv) is added and the reaction was allowed to stir at 23° C. for 14-28 h. Upon completion as judged by thin layer chromatography analysis, the reaction was split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired 3-bromo-isoxazoline.

Method 2

General conditions for the preparation of 3-bromo-isoxazolines: A flask is charged with glyoxylic acid monohydrate (1.0 equiv) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (1.1 equiv). The mixture was dissolved in water (2.0 M with respect to glyoxylic acid monohydrate) and stirred at 23° C. for 24 h. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide the desired crude oxime which was used directly in subsequent cycloaddition. The resulting oxime (1.1 equiv) from the first step is suspended in a 3:1 mixture of dimethoxyethane:water (v/v) (0.15 M with respect to oxime) and cooled to 0° C. N-Bromosuccinamide (NBS) (2.0 equiv) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir at 23° C. for 20 min. The resulting mixture is then added to a solution of alkene (1.0 equiv) and potassium bicarbonate (2.5 equiv) in dimethoxyethane (1.50 M with respect to alkene) and the reaction is allowed to stir for 20 h at 23° C. Upon completion as judged by thin layer chromatography analysis, the reaction was split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired 3-bromo-isoxazoline.

Method 3

General conditions for the preparation of 3-aryloxy-isoxazolines or 3-heteroaryloxy-isoxazolines: A microwave reaction vial is charged with a given 3-bromo-isoxazoline (1.0 equiv) and an alcohol (e.g., a phenol or a hydroxypyridine) (3.0 equiv) and dissolved in N-methylpyrrolidine (0.50 M with respect to isoxazoline). Crushed sodium hydroxide (2.0 equiv) is added and the mixture was sealed and heated in a microwave reaction at 150° C. for 30 min. The reaction was then split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired isoxazoline.

Method 4

General conditions for the preparation of 3-aryloxy-isoxazolines or 3-heteroaryloxy-isoxazolines: A flask is charged with a given 3-bromo-isoxazoline (1.0 equiv) and the alcohol (e.g., a phenol or a hydroxypyridine) (2.0 equiv) and dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.4 M with respect to isoxazoline). Sodium hydride (2.0 equiv) is added and the reaction is allowed to stir for 10 min until all of the gas evolution ceases. The reaction is then heated to 150° C. for 1-5 h. After the reaction is determine to be complete by thin layer chromatography analysis, the reaction was then split between water and ethyl acetate, and the organic layer was washed with 1N NaOH and brine, and then dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired isoxazoline.

Method 5

General conditions for the preparation of 3-aryloxy-isoxazolines: A flask is charged with a given 3-bromo-isoxazoline (1.0 equiv) and the alcohol (e.g., a phenol or a hydroxypyridine) (2.0 equiv) and dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide or N-methylpyrrolidinone (0.15 M with respect to isoxazole). Cesium carbonate (1.2 to 3 equiv) is added and the reaction is heated to 120° C. in an oil bath for 1 h. The reaction was then split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (methanol/methylene chloride) to provide the desired isoxazoline.

Method 6

General conditions for the preparation of alkenes: under a nitrogen atmosphere, 0.25 M methyltriphenylphosphonium bromide (1.1 equiv) dissolved in tetrahydrofuran was cooled to 0° C. after which the mixture was treated drop wise with sodium hexamethyldisilazane (NaHMDS) in tetrahydrofuran (1.0 M, 1.2 equiv). After stirring an additional 30 min at 0° C., a given aldehyde or ketone is added and the reaction is allowed to warm slowly to 23° C. overnight. The mixture was quenched saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to remove the tetrahydrofuran. The mixture was then diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alkene.

Method 7

General conditions for the preparation of alkenes: under a nitrogen atmosphere, 0.15 M methyltriphenylphosphonium bromide (1.5 equiv) dissolved in tetrahydrofuran was cooled to −78° C. after which the mixture was treated drop wise with n-butyl lithium in hexanes (2.5 M, 1.5 equiv). After stirring an additional 1 h at −78° C., a given aldehyde or ketone is added and the reaction is allowed to warm slowly to 23° C. overnight. The mixture was quenched saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to remove the tetrahydrofuran. The mixture was then diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alkene.

Method 8

General conditions for the preparation of alkenes: under a nitrogen atmosphere, 0.12 M methyltriphenylphosphonium bromide (2.5 equiv) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran after which potassium tert-butoxide (4.0 equiv) was added in six portions. After stirring an additional 1 h at 23° C., a given aldehyde or ketone is added and the reaction was heated to 55° C. for 2 h. The mixture was quenched saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to remove the tetrahydrofuran. The mixture was then acidified to pH 5-6 with 1N HCl and extracted with methylene chloride. The organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alkene.

Method 9

General conditions for the preparation of styrenes: a dry flask under argon atmosphere was charged with aryl bromide (1.0 equiv), potassium vinyltrifluoroborate (1.2 equiv), 1,1″-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocenedichloropalladium(II) methylene chloride adduct (0.02 equiv) and triethylamine (1.0 equiv) and the mixture was suspended in isopropanol (0.25 M with respect to aryl bromide) and heated at 80° C. for 2-24 h. The mixture was then diluted with water and extracted with diethyl ether. The organic layer was washed with brine and then dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired styrene.

Method 10

General conditions for the preparation of styrenes: a dry flask under a nitrogen atmosphere was charged with aryl bromide (1.0 equiv), tributylvinyltin (1.1 equiv) and dissolved in toluene (0.3 M with respect to bromide). The resulting mixture was further purged with nitrogen for 10 min after which tetrakis(triphenyphosphine)palladium (0.1 equiv) was added and the reaction was refluxed for 1.5 h. After the reaction was determined to be complete by TLC analysis, it was allowed to cool and loaded directly onto a silica gel column where it was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired styrene.

Method 11

General conditions for the hydrolysis of pyridyl and pyrimidinyl boronic acids to their corresponding phenols: A flask is charged with a given boronic acid or ester thereof (1.0 equiv) and dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (1.1 M, 10 volumes). Sodium perborate (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in water (1.1 M with respect to boronic acid, 10 volumes) and sonicated for 10 min. The perborate suspension is then added to the THF solution using tetrahydrofuran (1.6 volumes) to rinse the remaining solid perborate into the reaction mixture. The reaction is allowed to stir at room temperature (reaction is mildly exothermic) after which ammonium chloride is added in three portions (10 equiv) and the reaction cooled back down to room temperature. After 40 min, the reaction was concentrated under vacuum until all of the tetrahydrofuran was removed. The resulting solid was collected by vacuum filtration, washed with excess waster and dried in a vacuum oven for 40° C. for 3d to provide the desired phenol in 80% yield.

Chiral HPLC Method

Enantiomeric or diastereomeric mixtures of compounds can be separated using known methods, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and chiral supercritical fluid chromatography (SFC). Exemplary chiral columns found useful in separating such mixtures of compounds of the present invention include, but are not limited to, ChiralPak® AD-H, ChiralPak® OD-H, ChiralPak® AY, RegisPack™, and S,S WhelkO®-1 and LUX™ Cellulose2 columns. One or more of these columns were used to separate enantiomeric mixtures of compounds of the present invention in order to obtain substantially enantiomerically pure compounds.

Synthesis of Exemplary Compounds of Formula I

Syntheses of exemplary compounds are set forth below. Compounds were assayed as inhibitors of human FAAH using the method described in detail in Example 254. Activity designated as “A” refers to compounds having a K_(i) of less than or equal to 100 nM, “B” refers to compounds having a K_(i) of between 100 nM and 1 microM, and “C” refers to compounds having a K_(i) of greater than or equal to 1 microM.

Example 1

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-1a and I-1b were prepared in 1 step from styrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=225.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 2

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-2a and I-2b were prepared in 1 step from 4-fluorostyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. Activity: B

Example 3

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-3a and I-3b were prepared in 1 step from 4-chlorostyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=259.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 4

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-4a and I-4-b were prepared in 1 step from 3-chlorostyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=258.9 m/z. Activity: B

Example 5

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-5a and I-5b were prepared in 1 step from 2-chlorostyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=258.9 m/z. Activity: B

Example 6

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-6a and I-6b were prepared in 1 step from 4-methoxystyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=255.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 7

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-7a and I-7b were prepared in 1 step from 3-methoxystyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=255.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 8

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-8a and I-8b were prepared in 1 step from 2-methoxystyrene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=255.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 9

(I-9)

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-9a and I-9b were prepared in 1 step from 4-vinylbiphenyl using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=301.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 10

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-10a and I-10b were prepared in 1 step from 4-phenoxystyrene using Method 2. These compounds were separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=317.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 11

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-11a and I-11b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 3-phenoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]⁻=317.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 12

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-12a and I-12b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4-(pyridin-3-yloxy)benzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]⁻=318.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 13

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-13a and I-13b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4-(pyrimidin-2-yloxy)-benzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=319.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 14

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-14a and I-14b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4-trifluoromethoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=309.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 15

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-15a and I-15b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4-isopropoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=238.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 16

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-16a and I-16b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from piperonal using Method 7 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=269.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 17

3-chloro-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-17a and I-17b were prepared in using the analogous procedure as Example 10 except that N-chlorosuccinamide was used in the place of N-bromosuccinamide. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=273.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 18

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-18a and I-18b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 3-(4-bromophenoxy)-6-methylpyridazine using Method 9 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=333.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 19

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-19a and I-19b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 2-(4-bromophenyl)-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazole using Method 9 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=369.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 20

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-20a and I-20b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4-butoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=297.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 21

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-21a and I-21b were prepared in 2 steps starting with the coupling between 4-vinylbenzoic acid and benzyl alcohol as follows: 4-Vinylbenzoic acid (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.20 M with respect to acid). Benzyl alcohol is added (2.0 equiv) followed by EDC (1.05 equiv) and a catalytic amount of DMAP (0.05 equiv). The reaction is allowed to stir at 23° C. for 14 h after which point the reaction was split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with 0.5 M citric acid solution (2×) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (1×), dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired ester. This compound was then converted to the desired 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=359.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 22

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-22a and I-22b were prepared in using the analogous procedure as Example 21 except that benzylamine was used in the place of benzyl alcohol. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=358.9 m/z. Activity: B

Example 23

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-23a and I-23b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and phenol using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=331.1 m/z. Activity: C

Example 24

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-24a and I-24b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 4-fluorophenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=350.3 m/z. Activity: C

Example 25

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-25a and I-25b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 3-fluorophenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=349.3 m/z. Activity: B

Example 26

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-26a and I-26b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 3-trifluoromethylphenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=400.3 m/z. Activity: C

Example 27

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-27a and I-27b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 4-cyanophenol using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=356.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 28

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-28a and I-28b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 2-cyanophenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=357.3 m/z. Activity: C

Example 29

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-29a and I-29b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 4-nitrolphenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=376.8 m/z. Activity: B

Example 30

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-30a and I-30b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 4-methylsulfonylphenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=409.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 31

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-31a and I-31b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 4-methyl-3-fluorophenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=364.4 m/z. Activity: C

Example 32

A microwave reaction vial is charged with racemic compound I-10 (1.0 equiv) and aniline (4.0 equiv). The mixture was sealed and heated in a microwave reactor at 150° C. for 2 h. The reaction was then split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired 3-amino-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-32a and I-32b. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=330.1 m/z. Activity: C.

Example 33

1-(4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-yl)pyridin-2(1H)-one I-33a and I-33b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 2-hydroxypyridine using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=332.1 m/z. Activity: C

Example 34

A microwave reaction vial is charged with racemic ompound I-10 (1.0 equiv) and the sodium salt of 1,2,4-triazole (2.0 equiv). The reagents are dissolved in N-methylpyrrolidine (0.18 M with respect to compound I-10). The mixture was sealed and heated in a microwave reactor at 100° C. for 30 min. Excess water is added and a brown solid crashes out which is isolated using vacuum filtration and dried to provide the desired 3-(1H-1,2,4-triazol-1-yl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-34a and I-34b. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=306.1 m/z. Activity: C.

Example 35

Pyrazole (3.0 equiv) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.60 M with respect to pyraole) and NaH (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 3.0 equiv) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir under nitrogen for 5 min. After that point racemic compound I-10 was added. The reaction was then heated to 90° C. for 14 h after which it was cooled and quenched with methanol (0.30 M with prespect to pyrazole). The crude mixture was filtered through cotton and directly purified by semi-prep reverse phase chromatograpy to provide the desired 3-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-35a and I-35b. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=306.4 m/z. Activity: C.

Example 36

3-(pyridin-4-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-36a and I-36b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 4-hydroxypyridine using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=332.1 m/z. Activity: C

Example 37

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-37a and I-37b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 3 or Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=332.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 38

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-38a and I-38b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-6 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=270.1 m/z. Activity: B

Example 39

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-39a and I-39b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and methyl 5-hydroxynicotinate using Method 3 or Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 40

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-40a and I-40b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 5-hydroxy-2-methylpyridine using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=346.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 41

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-41a and I-41b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=333.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 42

3-(quinolin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-42a and I-42b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 3-hydroxyquinoline using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=382.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 43

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-43a and I-43b was prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 5-fluoro-3-hydroxypyridine using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=350.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 44

3-(1-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-4a and I-44b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 1-methyl-1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-ol using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=385.1 m/z. Activity: B

Example 45

A vial is charged with racemic compound I-10 (1.0 equiv) and dissolved in methanol (0.05 M with respect to isoxazole). Potassium carbonate (5.0 equiv) was added and the reaction was sealed and heated to 50° C. for 24 h. The reaction was then split between water and ethyl acetate, and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired 3-methoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-45a and I-45b. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=269.1 m/z. Activity: C.

Example 46

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-46a and I-46b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and methyl 5-hydroxynicotinate using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=384.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 47

Racemic compound I-39 is dissolved in ammonia in methanol (7.0 M in methanol, 0.02 M with respect to isoxazole). The reaction is sealed and allowed to stir at 23° C. for 24 h after which point the solvent and excess ammonia are removed under a stream of nitrogen to provide a light brown solid which is triturated with hexanes to provide the desired amide I-47a and I-47b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=374.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 48

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-48a and I-48b were prepared in 1 step from 3-phenyl-1-propene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=239.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 49

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-49a and I-49b were prepared in 1 step from 4-phenyl-1-butene using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=253.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 50

Phenol (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in ethanol (0.5 M with respect to phenol) and sodium hydroxide (1.0 equiv) is added followed by the addition of 4-bromo-1-butene. The mixture is heated to reflux for 1 h after which the majority of the solvent is removed under vacuum. The reaction was then split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo to provide crude alkene which was directly converted to the desired 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-50a and I-50b in 1 step using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=269.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 51

Phenol (1.2 equiv) is dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.4 M with respect to phenol) and cesium carbonate (1.3 equiv) is added followed by the addition of 5-bromo-1-pentene (1.0 equiv) and tetrabutylammonium iodide (0.10 equiv). The mixture is heated to 50° C. for 16 h. The reaction was then split between water and tert-butyl methyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with dilute sodium hydroxide solution, water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude alkene was directly converted to the desired 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-51a and I-51b in 1 step using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=283.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 52

2-Phenylethanol (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.8 M with respect to alcohol) and crushed sodium hydroxide (2.0 equiv) is added followed by the addition of allyl bromide (1.0 equiv) and tetrabutylammonium iodide (0.10 equiv). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 48 h. The reaction was then split between water and tert-butylmethyl ether, and the organic layer was washed with dilute Na₂S₂O₃ solution and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alkene which was directly converted to the desired 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-52a and I-52b in 1 step using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=285.6 m/z. Activity: B

Example 53

Racemic compound I-46 is dissolved in ammonia in methanol (7.0 M in methanol, 0.02 M with respect to isoxazole). The reaction is sealed and allowed to stir at 23° C. for 72 h after which point the solvent and excess ammonia are removed under a stream of nitrogen to provide a light brown solid which is triturated with hexanes to provide desired amide I-53a and I-53b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=366.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 54

Racemic compound I-46 is dissolved in ammonia in methylamine (2.0 M in tetrahydrofuran, 0.02 M with respect to isoxazole). The reaction is sealed and allowed to stir at 23° C. for 72 h after which point the solvent and excess ammonia are removed under a stream of nitrogen to provide a light brown solid which is triturated with hexanes to provide desired amide I-54a and I-54b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=380.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 55

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-55a and I-55b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-46 and methyl 5-hydroxynicotinate using Method 5 and was isolated as a side product from the reaction during flash silica gel chromatography. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=367.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 56

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-56a and I-56b was prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 5-hydroxy-2-trifluoromethylpyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=401.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 57

3-(1H-pyrrolo[3,2-b]pyridin-6-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-57a and I-57b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-b]pyridin-6-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=370.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 58

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-58a and I-58b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 3-cyanophenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=356.8 m/z. Activity: B

Example 59

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-59a and I-59b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 2-fluorophenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=350.3 m/z. Activity: B

Example 60

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-60a and I-60b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 4-fluoro-3-(trifluoromethyl)phenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. Activity: C

Example 61

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-61a and I-61b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and methyl 3-hydroxybenzoate using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=390.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 62

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-62a and I-62b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and methyl 4-hydroxybenzoate using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=389.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 63

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-63a and I-63b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 3-(methylsulfonyl)phenol using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=409.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 64

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-64a and I-64b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 3-hydroxybenzenesulfonamide using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=409.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 65

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-65a and I-65b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 5-methoxypyridin-3-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=363.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 66

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-66a and I-66b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=364.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 67

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-67a and I-67b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and methyl 5-hydroxypicolinate using Method 3. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 68

3-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-68a and I-68b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-5-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=370.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 69

6-(4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-yloxy)furo[3,2-b]pyridine I-69a and I-69b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-10 and furo[3,2-b]pyridin-6-ol using Method 5 after furo[3,2-b]pyridin-6-ol is prepared from 6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)furo[3,2-b]pyridine using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=374.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 70

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-70a and I-70b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=324.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 71

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-71a and I-71b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 5-bromo-3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=402.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 72

Racemic compound I-71 (1.0 equiv), phenyl boronic acid (1.1 equiv), potassium acetate (1.0 equiv), cesium carbonate (3.0 equiv), and dichloro[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino) ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct (14 mol %) were suspended in 1 mL DMSO and purgetd with Ar. The resulting mixture was sealed and heated to 80° C. for 1 h. The crude mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and extracted with methyl tert-butylether (2×). The organic layers were combined, dried over Na₂SO₄ and purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient of 2-10% MeOH) to provided the desired 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-72a and I-72b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=402.3 m/z. Activity: B

Example 73

Racemic compound I-71 (1.0 equiv), 3-carbamoylphenyl boronic acid (1.1 equiv), potassium acetate (1.0 equiv), cesium carbonate (3.0 equiv), and dichloro[1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino) ferrocene]palladium(II) dichloromethane adduct (14 mol %) were suspended in 1 mL DMSO and purged with Ar. The resulting mixture was sealed and heated to 80° C. for 1 h. The crude mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and extracted with methyl tert-butylether (2×). The organic layers were combined, dried over Na₂SO₄ and purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient of 2-10% MeOH) to provided the desired 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-73a and I-73b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=442.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 74

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-74a and I-74b were prepared in 1 step from methyl 4-vinylbenzoate using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=283.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 75

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-75a and I-75b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4′(trifluoromethoxy)acetophenone using Method 6 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=323.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 76

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-76a and I-76b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4′-phenoxyacetophenone using Method 6 followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=331.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 77

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-77a and I-77b were prepared in 1 step from trans-anethole using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=269.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 78

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-78a and I-78b were was prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 4-phenoxybenzaldehyde using Method 6 (except that ethyltriphenyphosphonium bromide is used in the place of methyltriphenylphosphoium bromide) followed by cycloaddition using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=331.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 79

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-82a and I-82b were prepared in 3 steps from 4-phenoxybenzaldehyde as follows: 4-Phenoxybenzaldehyde (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (0.20 M with respect to tetrahydrofuran) and cooled to 0° C. Ethyl magnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 1.2 equiv) is added dropwise after which the reaction is allowed to stir at 23° C. for 2 h. The mixture was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and concentrated to remove the tetrahydrofuran. The mixture was then diluted with water and extracted with tert-butyl methyl ether. The organic layer was washed with water and brine and then dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alcohol I-80.

The purified alcohol I-80 is then dissolved in pyridine (0.80 M with respect to alcohol). Phosphorus oxychloride (1.1 equiv) is added and the mixture was heated to reflux for 2 h. After this point the reaction is cooled to 0° C. and quenched with the addition of excess water. The mixture was then diluted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water and brine and then dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated in vacuo. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alkene I-81.

Alkene I-81 was then converted to the desired 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-82a and I-82b using Method 2. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=331.0 m/z. Activity: B.

Example 80

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-83a and I-83b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and methyl 3-(5-hydroxypyridin-2-yl)benzoate using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=460.1 m/z. Activity: B

Example 81

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-84a and I-84b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and ethyl 3-(5-hydroxypyridin-2-yl)benzoate using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=474.1 m/z. Activity: B

Example 82

Racemic compound I-83 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid I-85a and I-85b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=443.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 83

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-86a and I-86b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 6-phenylpyridin-3-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=402.2 m/z. Activity: B

Example 84

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-87a and I-87b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-12 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=333.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 85

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-88a and I-88b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=340.2 m/z. Activity: B

Example 86

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-89a and I-89b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-76 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=348.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 87

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-90a and I-90b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 4-hydroxybenzenesulfonamide using Method 4. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=410.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 88

The trans 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-91a and I-91b were prepared in 1 step from either racemic compound I-78 or I-82 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=346.2 m/z. Activity: C

Example 89

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-92a and I-92b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-10 and (5-hydroxy-pyridin-2-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester using Method 5 after formation of (5-hydroxy-pyridin-2-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester from tert-butyl 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-ylcarbamate using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=447.9 m/z. Activity: C

Example 90

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-92 was dissolved in trifluoroacetic acid (0.20 M with respect to isoxazole) and stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The solvent is then removed under vacuum and the crude residue is azeotroped with toluene (2×) to provide I-93a and I-93b as the TFA salt (white solid). These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=347.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 91

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-93 was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.03 M with respect to isxozaole) after which triethylamine (4.0 equiv) and acetic anhydride (3.0 equiv are added). The reaction is allowed to stir for 16 h after which point is diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with saturated NaHCO₃ (2×) and brine (1×). The organic layer is then dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide acetate I-94a and I-94b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=388.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 92

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-95a and I-95b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 1-(4-phenoxyphenyl)propan-1-one using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=347.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 93

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-96a and I-96b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester according to the following procedure: 3-bromo-5-(4-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole (1.0 equiv), 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester (1.2 equiv), and cesium hydrogencarbonate (1.50 equiv) are suspended in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.32 M with respect to dihydroisoxazole. The mixture is then degassed with argon after which it is heated to 130° C. for 4 h after which point there is only desired product and corresponding acid visible by LC/MS. The reaction is allowed to cool to room temperature and quenched by pouring into a solution of ammonium chloride in water (30% by weight, 0.08 M with respect to dihydroisoxazole). The aqueous phase is extracted with ethyl acetate (2×), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to product a brown solid which could be recystallized from absolute ethanol to provide racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-96 that was isolated by filtration as a white solid (25% yield). These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=383.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 94

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-96 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid enantiomers I-97a and I-97b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=369.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 95

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-98a and I-98b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-10 and 3-(5-hydroxypyridin-2-yl)propanoic acid methyl ester using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=418.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 96

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-98 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid I-99a and I-99b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=402.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 97

Racemic compound I-98 is dissolved in ammonia in methanol (7.0 M in methanol, 0.02 M with respect to isoxazole). The reaction is sealed and allowed to stir at 23° C. for 72 h after which point the solvent and excess ammonia are removed under a stream of nitrogen to provide a light brown solid which is triturated with hexanes to provide the desired amide I-100a and I-100b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=404.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 98

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-101a and I-101b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-9 and 3-hydroxypyridine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=316.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 99

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-102a and I-102b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 1-(biphenyl-4-yl)ethanone using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=315.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 100

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-103a and I-103b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-9 and 5-hydroxyprimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=318.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 101

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-104a and I-104b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-102 and 5-hydroxyprimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=332.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 102

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-97 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.03 M with respect to isoxazole). Thionyl chloride is added (2.0 equiv) and the reaction was stirred for 1 h at room temperature after which point it was concentrated under vacuum to a beige solid which was azeotroped with toluene (2×). The resultant solid was redissolved in tetrahydrofuran (0.03 M with respect to isoxazole) after which glycine methyl ester (1.5 equiv) was added followed by triethylamine (3.0 equiv). The reaction was stirred for 1 h at room temperature after which point it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was then washed with saturated NaHCO₃ solution and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide crude material which was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide amide I-105a and I-105b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=437.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 103

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-105 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid I-106a and I-106b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=423.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 104

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-107a and I-107b were prepared in using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that methylamine was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=382.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 105

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-108a and I-108b were prepared in using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that dimethylamine was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+^(=396.6) m/z. Activity: B

Example 106

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-109a and I-109b were prepared in using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that ethanolamine was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=409.9 m/z. Activity: A

Example 107

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-67 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid I-110a and I-110b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=376.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 108

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-67 is dissolved in dimethylamine in methanol (2.0 M in tetrahydrofuran, 0.02 M with respect to isoxazole). The reaction is sealed and allowed to stir at 23° C. for 72 h after which point the solvent and excess dimethylamine are removed under a stream of nitrogen to provide a light brown solid which is triturated with hexanes to provide the desired amide I-111a and I-111b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=405.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 109

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-112a and I-112b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. Activity: A

Example 110

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-113a and I-113b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-75 and 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5 followed by hydrolysis under the same conditions as in example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=380.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 111

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-114a and I-114b were prepared from racemic compound I-113 by using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that methylamine (2.0M in tetrahydrofuran) was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=396.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 112

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-115a and I-115b were prepared from racemic compound I-113 by using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that ethylamine was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=411.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 113

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-116a and I-116b were prepared from racemic compound I-113 by using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that trifluoroethylamine was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=461.7 m/z. Activity: B

Example 114

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-117a and I-117b were prepared from racemic compound I-113 by using the analogous procedure as Example 102 except that hydroxylamine hydrochloride was used in the place of glycine methyl ester. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+−=398.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 115

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-105 is dissolved in ammonia in methanol (7.0 M in methanol, 0.02 M with respect to isoxazole). The reaction is sealed and allowed to stir at 23° C. for 72 h after which point the solvent and excess ammonia are removed under a stream of nitrogen to provide a light brown solid which is triturated with hexanes to provide desired amide I-118a and I-118b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=325.1 m/z. Activity: B

Example 116

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-119a and I-119b was synthesized in three steps starting with the conversion of 4-bromo-3,3′-difluorobiphenyl to its corresponding alkene using Method 9 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1 followed by displacement with 5-hydroxyprimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=354.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 117

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-120a and I-120b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 3-fluoro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=327.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 118

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-121a and I-121b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-120 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=344.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 119

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-122a and I-122b was prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-120 and 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=400.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 120

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-122 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid I-123a and I-123b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=386.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 121

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-124a and I-124b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 3-chloro-4-(trifluoromethoxy)benzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=345.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 122

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-125a and I-125b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-124 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=359.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 123

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-126a and I-126b were prepared in 2 steps starting with alkene formation from 2,2-difluoro-1,3-benzodioxole-5-carboxaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=305.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 124

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-127a and I-127b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-126 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=321.8 m/z. Activity: B

Example 125

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-128a and I-128b were prepared in analogous fashion to compound I-99 in Example 96 except that racemic compound I-14 was used as starting material in place of racemic compound I-10. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=398.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 126

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-129a and I-129b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=339.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 127

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-130a and I-130b were prepared in 2 steps starting with the coupling between 4-phenoxyphenylboronic acid and 2-bromo-3,3,3-trifluoroprop-1-ene as follows: A solution of toluene (0.25 M with respect to boronic acid) is cooled to 0° C. in a sealed tube after which point 2-bromo-3,3,3-trifluoroprop-1-ene (0.83 equiv) is added followed by palladium tetrakis (2.5 mol %). The mixture is purged with Ar after which point a 2.0 M solution of sodium carbonate (1.5 equiv) is added followed by the boronic acid (1.0 equiv) in methanol (1.0 M with respect to boronic acid). The mixture was purged a second time with Ar after which point it was heated to 70° C. in an oil bath for 20 h. The reaction was allowed to cool after which it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate, washed with a 2.0M solution of sodium carbonate (1×) and water (2×). The organic layer was dried and concentrated to provide a black oil which was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired alkene as an oil in 35% yield which was converted directly to the desired racemic 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-130 using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=385.6 m/z. Activity: B

Example 128

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-131a and I-131b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-130 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=401.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 129

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-132a and I-132b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-5-ol using Method 5 after 2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-5-ol is first prepared from 2-(methylthio)pyrimidin-5-ylboronic acid using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=372.2 m/z. Activity: B

Example 130

Racemic 3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-132 was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.5 M with respect to isoxazole) after which point m-chloroperbenzoic acid (2.0 equiv) was added in 1 portion and the reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h. After the reaction was determined to be complete by LC/MS, the solvent was evaporated. The crude mixture was then redissolved in tert-butylmethyl ether (0.5 M) after which hexane was slowly added until a solid precipitated. The solid was then collected via vacuum filtration and washed with 1:1 hexanes/tert-butylmethyl ether to provide the desired 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-133a and I-133b as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=404.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 131

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-134a and I-134b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol using Method 5 after 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol is first prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=372.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 132

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-135a and I-135b were prepared from I-134 in analogous fashion to compound I-133 in example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=403.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 133

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-136a and I-136b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 5-fluoro-6-methoxypyridin-3-ol using Method 5 after 5-fluoro-6-methoxypyridin-3-ol is first prepared from 5-fluoro-6-methoxypyridin-3-boronic acid using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=373.4 m/z. Activity: B

Example 134

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-137a and I-137b were prepared in 3 steps from 4-butoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=370.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 135

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-138a and I-138b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-137 using the analogous hydrolysis conditions as in Example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=357.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 136

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-139a and I-139b was prepared in 3 steps from 4-butoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=314.9 m/z. Activity: A

Example 137

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-140a and I-140b were prepared in 4 steps from 4-iso-propoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5 followed by hydrolysis using the analogous conditions as in Example 94 These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=343.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 138

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-141a and I-141b were prepared in 3 steps from 4-iso-propoxybenzaldehyde using Method 8 followed by cycloaddition using Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=299.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 139

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-142a and I-142b were prepared in 3 steps from 4-vinylphenyl acetate using the cycloaddition conditions in Method 1. The resulting acetate is dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (1.0 equiv, 0.18 M with respect to bromoisoxazole) and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath. Lithium hydroxide (3.0 equiv, 1.0 M in water) is added and the reaction is allowed to stir for 30 min after which point it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was extracted with saturated ammonium chloride, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to provide the desired phenol in quantitative yield which was used directly. The phenol (1.00 equiv) was dissolved in acetonitrile (0.20 M with respect to starting material) and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath. Propargyl bromide (2.0 equiv) was added followed by cesium carbonate (3.0 equiv). The reaction was allowed to stir for 2 h after which it was quenched with saturated ammonium chloride and transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to provide the desired racemic alkyne I-142 which was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired racemic compound in 70% yield. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=279.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 140

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-143a and I-143b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-142 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=296.5 m/z. Activity: B

Example 141

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-144a and I-144b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-142 and 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=353.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 142

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-145a and I-145b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-144 using the analogous hydrolysis conditions as in Example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=338.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 143

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-146a and I-146b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-61 using the analogous hydrolysis conditions as in Example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=376.2 m/z. Activity: B

Example 144

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-147a and I-147b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-62 using the analogous hydrolysis conditions as in Example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=375.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 145

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-148a and I-148b were prepared in 1 step from 1-bromo-4-vinylbenzene using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=350.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 146

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-149a and I-149b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-148 and 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=378.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 147

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-150a and I-150b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-149 using the analogous hydrolysis conditions as in Example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=362.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 148

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-151a and I-151b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 4-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=384.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 149

Racemic 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-151 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in 1:1 tetrahydrofuran/water (0.06 M) and lithium hydroxide (8.0 equiv) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 1 h after which point the tetrahydrofuran was removed under a stream of nitrogen and the remaining solution was acidified to pH<2 with 1N HCl to provide the desired acid I-152a and I-152b as a white solid which was isolated via vacuum filtration. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=368.9 m/z. Activity: A

Example 150

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-153a and I-153b were prepared in 2 steps 1-chloro-4-vinylbenzene using Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=277.3 m/z. Activity: B

Example 151

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-154a and I-154b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 6-(furan-3-yl)pyridin-3-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 152

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-155a and I-155b were prepared from racemic acid I-110 according to the following procedure: in a microwave reactor tube, acetyl hydrazide (1.0 equiv) and acid I-110 (1.0 equiv) were dissolved in dry acetonitrile (0.1 M each). Polystyrene-supported triphenylphosphine (3.0 equiv) and trichloroacetonitrile (2.0 equiv) were added, and the mixture was sealed and heated in a microwave reactor at 130° C. for 2 hours. After this point the reaction was determined to be incomplete by LC/MS such that 1.5 additional equivalents of triphenylphosphine resin were added followed by 1.0 additional equivalents of trichloroacetonitrile. The vessel was resealed and heated for an additional 2 h at 130° C. On completion, the concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate) to provide the desired racemic oxadiazole I-155. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=415.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 153

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-156a and I-156b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 152 except that racemic compound I-113 was used as the starting acid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=422.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 154

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-157a and I-157b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 152 except that racemic compound I-97 was used as the starting acid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=407.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 155

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-158a and I-158b were prepared from racemic acid I-113 according to the following procedure: acetyl hydrazide (1.0 equiv) and acid I-113 (1.0 equiv) were dissolved in dry dichloromethane (0.1 M each) and treated with EDC (1.05 equiv) and DMAP (0.10 equiv) after which the reaction mixture was allowed to stir at 23° C. for 6 h. After the reaction is complete it was diluted into a separatory funnel with excess dichloromethane and water and the organic layer was washed twice each with 0.5 M aqueous citric acid and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic layer was dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated to a white solid. This solid was dissolved in dry THF and 1.2 equiv Lawesson's reagent is added. The mixture was sealed in a tube and heated in a microwave reactor at 115° C. for 30 min. The concentrated reaction mixture was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate) to provide the desired racemic thiadiazole I-158. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=438.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 156

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-159a and I-159b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 152 except that racemic compound I-147 was used as the starting acid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=413.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 157

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-160a and I-160b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 152 except that racemic compound I-146 was used as the starting acid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=414.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 158

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-162a and I-162b were prepared according to the following procedure: Racemic dihydroisoxazole I-161 was prepared in 1 step from compound I-14 and 6-bromopyridin-3-ol using Method 5. Compound I-161 placed in a microwave vial and then dissolved in dioxane (0.02 M). 2-(tributylstannyl)thiazole and palladium tetrakis were added and the reaction was purged with Argon. At this point the reaction was heated in the microwave reactor for 20 min after which there was no starting material by TLC analysis. The mixture is concentrated and purified by flash silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate) to provide the desired racemic thiazole I-162 in 50% yield. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=407.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 159

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-163a and I-163b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 158 except that 2-(tributylstannyl)oxazole was used in place of 2-(tributylstannyl)thiazole. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=393.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 160

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-164a and I-164b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 158 except that racemic compound I-75 was used in place of compound I-14 as starting material. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=423.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 161

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-165a and I-165b were prepared according to the following procedure: racemic dihydroisoxazole I-161 and sodium carbonate (10.0 equiv) were placed in a microwave vial. A 2:2:1 mixture of toluene, ethanol and water (0.02 M with respect to I-161) was added followed by tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylateboronic acid (1.5 equiv). The mixture was purged with Ar for 20 min after which point palladium tetrakis (4 mol %) was added, the reaction was sealed and heated in an oil bath to 80° C. for 17 h. The reaction mixture was then allowed to cool after which it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed with water and saturated sodium chloride. The water layer was back extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide a crude oil that was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate) to provide the desired racemic pyrazole I-165 in 36% yield. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.4 m/z. Activity: C

Example 162

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-166a and I-166b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. [M−H]−=241.5 m/z. Activity: B

Example 163

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-167a and I-167b were prepared in analogous fashion to compound I-135 in example 132 except that racemic compound I-75 was used as the bromo-isoxazole starting material. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=417.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 164

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-168a and I-168b were prepared in 2 steps from 1-(trifluoromethyl)-4-vinylbenzene using the cycloaddition conditions from Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypyrimidine to provide racemic compound I-168 using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=309.8 m/z. Activity: B

Example 165

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-169a and I-169b were prepared in 3 steps from 1-(trifluoromethyl)-4-vinylbenzene using the cycloaddition conditions from Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to Example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=387.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 166

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-170a and I-170b were prepared in 3 steps from 1-(trifluoromethyl)-4-vinylbenzene using the cycloaddition conditions from Method 5. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 5-hydroxypicolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5 followed by hydrolysis using the analogous conditions as in example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=353.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 167

1-(4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-yl)-1H-1,2,4-triazole-3-carboxylic acid I-171a and I-171b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 35 except that racemic compound I-75 was used as the starting bromo-isoxazole and 1H-1,2,4-triazole-3-carboxylic acid methyl ester as the nucleophile Additionally, at some point during the course of the reaction or workup, the ester hydrolyzed to the corresponding acid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=356.6 m/z. Activity: C

Example 168

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-172a and I-172b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-2-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=378.1 m/z. Activity: C

Example 169

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-173a and I-173b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that tert-butyl 2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrrole-1-carboxylate was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=390.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 170

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-174a and I-174b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 3-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.3 m/z. Activity: B

Example 171

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-175a and I-175b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=391.6 m/z. Activity: B

Example 172

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-176a and I-176b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-14. Bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-14 was reacted with 3-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester using Method 5 followed by hydroysis using the analogous conditions as in example 94. [M+H]+=368.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 173

3-phenoxy-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-177a and I-177b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-14. Bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-14 was reacted with 4-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester using Method 5 followed by hydroysis using the analogous conditions as in Example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=368.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 174

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-178a and I-178b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-14 and 5-hydroxypicolinonitrile using Method 5 after 5-hydroxypicolinonitrile was prepared from 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)picolinonitrile using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=350.0 m/z. Activity: B

Example 175

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-179a and I-179b were prepared in 1 step from 1-pentyl-4-vinylbenzene using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=283.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 176

3-(pyrimidin-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-180a and I-180b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-179 and 5-hydroxypyrimidine using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=298.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 177

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-181a and I-181b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-179 by first reacting I-179 with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (synthesized from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=375.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 178

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-182a and I-182b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-14 by first reacting I-14 with 6-(ethylthio)pyridin-3-ol (synthesized from 6-(ethylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=417.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 179

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-183a and I-183b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-14 by first reacting I-14 with 6-(cyclopentylthio)pyridin-3-ol (synthesized from 6-(cyclopentylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=456.8 m/z. Activity: B

Example 180

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-184a and I-184b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-14 by first reacting I-14 with 6-(iso-butylthio)pyridin-3-ol (synthesized from 6-(iso-butylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to Example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=444.7 m/z. Activity: B

Example 181

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-185a and I-185b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 178 except that racemic compound I-75 was used in place of compound I-75 as starting material and 2-(tributylstannyl)oxazole was used in place of 2-(tributylstannyl)thiazole (as in Example 158). These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=407.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 182

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-186a and I-186b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 2-furylboronic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 183

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-187a and I-187b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 5-methylfuran-2-ylboronic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 184

The enantioners of 3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-188a and I-188b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 5-boronofuran-2-carboxylic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=435.5 m/z. Activity: C

Example 185

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-189a and I-189b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 1-methyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 186

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-190a and I-190b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 1,3-dimethyl-1H-pyrazol-5-ylboronic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=419.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 187

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-191a and I-191b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-ylboronic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=473.3 m/z. Activity: C

Example 188

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-192a and I-192b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 1H-pyrazol-5-ylboronic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=391.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 189

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-193a and I-193b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 5-boronothiophene-2-carboxylic acid was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=450.6 m/z. Activity: B

Example 190

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-194a and I-194b were prepared according to the following procedure: racemic dihydroisoxazole I-161, tribasic potassium phosphate (3.0 equiv), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)isoxazole (1.2 equiv), and the palladium catalyst (10 mol %) were placed in a microwave vial. Dioxane (0.1 M with respect to I-161) was added and the mixture was purged with Ar for 20 min after which point the reaction was sealed and heated in an oil bath to 85° C. for 17 h. The reaction mixture was then allowed to cool after which it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed with water and saturated sodium chloride. The water layer was back extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers were combined, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide a crude oil that was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate) to provide the desired racemic pyrazole I-194 in <5% yield. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 191

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-195a and I-195b were prepared according to the following procedure: racemic dihydroisoxazole I-178 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.1 M with respect to isoxazole) after which ammonium chloride (3.1 equiv) and sodium azide (1.5 equiv) were added. The reaction was then heated in an oil bath to 120° C. for 4 h after which point it the reaction was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed with water and saturated sodium chloride, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide a crude oil that was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (hexanes/ethyl acetate) to provide the desired racemic tetrazole I-195. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=393.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 192

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-196a and I-196b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-75 by first reacting I-75 with 6-(ethylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(ethylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=431.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 193

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-197a and I-197b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-10 by first reacting I-10 with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=411.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 194

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-198a and I-198b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 6-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)pyridin-3-ol using Method 5 after 6-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)pyridin-3-ol was synthesized from 2-(1H-pyrazol-1-yl)-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridine using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=405.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 195

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-199a and I-199b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 3-(3-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-5-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.3 m/z. Activity: C

Example 196

3-(Phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-200a and I-200b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 4-(2-methyl-2H-tetrazol-5-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.4 m/z. Activity: B

Example 197

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-201a and I-201b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 4-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 198

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-202a and I-202b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedure: 4-vinylbenzoyl chloride (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.375 M with respect to styrene) after which morpholine (3.0 equiv) is added. The reaction is allowed to stir at room temperature for 14 h during which time a white precipitate began to form. The reaction was then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and methylene chloride. The organic layer was washed with water (1×), 1N HCl (1×), saturated sodium bicarbonate (1×) and brine (1×) after which point it was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide a yellow oil. This crude material was then directly used to form the desired racemic bromoisoxazole using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=338.7 m/z. Activity: B

Example 199

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-203a and I-203b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 198 except that dimethyl amine in tetrahydrofuran (2.0 M) was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=299.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 200

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-204a and I-204b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 198 except that methyl amine in tetrahydrofuran (2.0 M) was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=282.6 m/z. Activity: B

Example 201

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-205a and I-205b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedure: 4-vinylbenzene-1-sulfonyl chloride (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.50 M with respect to styrene) after which morpholine (3.0 equiv) is added. The reaction is allowed to stir at room temperature 90 min after which point it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and methylene chloride. The organic layer was washed with water (1×), 1N HCl (1×), saturated sodium bicarbonate (1×) and brine (1×) after which point it was dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide a yellow oil. This crude material was then directly used to form the desired racemic bromoisoxazole using Method 1. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=374.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 202

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-206a and I-206b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 201 except that dimethyl amine in THF (2.0 M) was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=332.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 203

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-207a and I-207b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 201 except that methyl amine in THF (2.0 M) was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=318.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 204

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-208a and I-208b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 198 except that piperidine was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=339.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 205

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-209a and I-209b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 198 except that pyrrolidine was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=322.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 206

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-210a and I-210b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 201 except that piperidine was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=472.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 207

3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-211a and I-211b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 201 except that pyrrolidine was used in place of morpholine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=358.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 208

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-212a and I-212b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-203 by first reacting I-203 with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=390.4 m/z. Activity: B

Example 209

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-213a and I-213b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-202 by first reacting I-202 with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=426.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 210

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-214a and I-214b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-21 by first reacting I-21 with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=352.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 211

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-215a and I-215b were prepared in 2 steps compound from racemic compound I-21. Bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-21 was reacted with 5-hydroxy picolinic acid methyl ester using Method 5 followed by hydrolysis using the analogous conditions as in example 94. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=418.3 m/z. Activity: B

Example 212

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-216a and I-216b were prepared in 2 steps from 1-(trifluoromethyl)-4-vinylbenzene using the cycloaddition conditions from Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 2-bromo-5-hydroxypyridine using Method 5 to provide racemic compound I-216. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=389.1 m/z. Activity: B

Example 213

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-217a and I-217b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 212 except that 3-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenol was used in place of 2-bromo-5-hydroxypyridine. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=376.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 214

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-218a and I-218b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 1-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=404.8 m/z. Activity: A

Example 215

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-219a and I-219b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 161 except that 1-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole was used in place of tert-butyl 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-1-carboxylate and racemic bromopyridine I-216 was used as the starting material rather than I-161. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=390.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 216

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-220a and I-220b were prepared according to the following procedure: acid I-97 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.08 M). Oxalyl chloride (1.5 equiv was added) followed by the addition of 1 drop of N,N-dimethylforamide. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 20 min after which it was concentrated under vacuum. The crude material was then redissolved in methylene chloride after which methanesulfonamide (1.2 equiv), DMAP (10 mol %) and triethylamine (1.5 equiv) were added. After 3 h, the reaction was determined to be complete by LC/MS analysis. The reaction mixture was then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed with 1N HCl and brine, drive over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide the desired sulfonamide. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=446.1 m/z. Activity: A

Example 217

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-221a and I-221b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 3-(4H-1,2,4-triazol-4-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.0 m/z. Activity: C

Example 218

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-222a and I-222b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedures: 3-hydroxy benzoic acid methyl ester is reacted with racemic bromoisoxazole I-75 using Method 5. The resulting methyl ester (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in methanol (0.08 M) after which hydrazine (50 equiv, 50% by weight in water) is added and the reaction is allowed to stir for 14 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and used directly in the next step. Triethylorthoacetate (8.0 equiv) is added and the reaction is sealed and heated to reflux for 14 h. The reaction is then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed water and brine, drive over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide crude material which was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired racemic oxadiazole I-222. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=420.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 219

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-223a and I-223b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 218 except that racemic compound I-15 was used in place of compound I-75 as starting material. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 220

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-224a and I-224b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedures: 3-fluoro-5-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester is reacted with racemic bromoisoxazole I-14 using Method 5. The resulting methyl ester (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in methanol (0.08 M) after which hydrazine (50 equiv, 50% by weight in water) is added and the reaction is allowed to stir for 14 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and used directly in the next step. Triethylorthoacetate (8.0 equiv) is added and the reaction is sealed and heated to reflux for 14 h. The reaction is then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed water and brine, drive over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide crude material which was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired racemic oxadiazole I-224. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=424.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 221

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-225a and I-225b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 220 except that triethylorthoformate was used in place of triethylorthoacetate to form the desired oxadiazole. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=410.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 222

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-226a and I-226b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 220 except that 4-fluoro-5-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester was used in place of 3-fluoro-5-hydroxybenzoic acid methyl ester in the first step. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=410.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 223

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-227a and I-227b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 222 except that racemic compound I-75 was used in place of compound I-14 as starting material. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=424.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 224

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-228a and I-228b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedures: 5-hydroxynicotinic acid methyl ester is reacted with racemic bromoisoxazole I-75 using Method 5. The resulting methyl ester (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in methanol (0.08 M) after which hydrazine (50 equiv, 50% by weight in water) is added and the reaction is allowed to stir for 14 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and used directly in the next step. Triethylorthoformate (8.0 equiv) is added and the reaction is sealed and heated to reflux for 14 h. The reaction is then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed water and brine, drive over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide crude material which was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired racemic oxadiazole I-228. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=407.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 225

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-229a and I-229b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 224 except that triethylorthoacetate was used in place of triethylorthoformate to form the desired oxadiazole. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=422.0 m/z. Activity: A

Example 226

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-230a and I-230b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 224 except that racemic compound I-14 was used in place of compound 75 as starting material. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=393.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 227

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-231a and I-231b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedures: 5-hydroxynicotinic acid methyl ester is reacted with racemic bromoisoxazole I-75 using Method 5. The resulting methyl ester (1.0 equiv) is dissolved in methanol (0.08 M) after which hydrazine (50 equiv, 50% by weight in water) is added and the reaction is allowed to stir for 14 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and used directly in the next step. The hydrazide is dissolved in dioxane (0.12 M with respect to hydrazide). N,N-Carbonydiimidazole (1.2 equiv) is added and the reaction is sealed and heated to reflux for 4 h. The reaction is then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was washed water and brine, drive over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide crude material which was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient methanol/dichloromethane) to provide the desired racemic 1,3,4-oxadiazol-2(3H)-one I-231. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=423.4 m/z. Activity: B

Example 228

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-232a and I-232b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 4-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.5 m/z. Activity: A

Example 229

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-233a and I-233b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 3-hydroxy-N,N-dimethylbenzenesulfonamide using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=445.4 m/z. Activity: C

Example 230

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-234a and I-234b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 4-(methylsulfonyl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=415.6 m/z. Activity: B

Example 231

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-235a and I-235b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 4-hydroxy-N,N-dimethylbenzenesulfonamide using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=445.3 m/z. Activity: C

Example 232

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-236a and I-236b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedures: racemic dihydroisoxazole I-161 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in N,N-dimethylforamide (0.1 M). Copper iodide (1.0 equiv) was added followed by trimethylsilylacetylene (3.0 equiv) and N,N-diisopropyl ethylamine (2.0 equiv). Palladium tetrakis (15 mol %) was added and the reaction was sealed and heated in a microwave reactor at 100° C. for 1 h. The reaction was allowed to cool after which it was transferred to a separatory funnel with ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was then washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes). The TMS group was then deprotected by dissolving this material in methanol (0.07 M) and adding potassium carbonate (3.0 equiv). After stirring for 4 h at room temperature, the reaction was transferred a separatory funnel with ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer was then washed with water and brine, dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes). The resulting alkyne was then converted to the desired triazole by first dissolving it in neat trimethyl silylazide (80 equiv), purging the reaction mixture with Argon and heating in a microwave reactor to 110° C. for 3 h. After an additional 4 h of heating the reaction was 60% complete by LC/MS analysis at which point it was concentrated and purified directly by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient methanol/methylene chloride) to provide the desired racemic triazole I-236. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.9 m/z. Activity: A

Example 233

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-237a and I-237b were prepared in 2 steps from racemic compound I-148 by first reacting I-148 with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 followed by oxidation under analogous conditions to example 130. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=396.6 m/z. Activity: A

Example 234

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-238a and I-238b were prepared in 2 steps from 1-(trifluoromethyl)-4-vinylbenzene using the cycloaddition conditions from Method 1. The resulting bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole was reacted with 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol (prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11) using Method 5 to provide compound I-238. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=355.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 235

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-240a and I-240b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedures: 6-bromopyridin-3-ol (1.0 equiv) and sodium carbonate (10.0 equiv) are added to a microwave vial. Toluene, ethanol, and water (0.16 M, 2:2:1 v/v) are added followed by 1-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (1.5 equiv). The mixture is purged with argon for 15 min followed by the addition of palladium tetrakis (4 mol %). The reaction tube is then covered with aluminum foil and heated to 80° C. in an oil bath for 17 h. After cooling the reaction was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was then washed with water (1×), saturated ammonium chloride (1×) and brine (1×). The aqueous layers were combined and washed with ethyl acetate (1×). The organic layers were then combined, dried over sodium sulfate, concentrated and purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient methanol/methylene chloride) to provide 6-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)pyridin-3-ol I-239 as a white solid. This compound is then reacted with racemic 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-75 using Method 5 to provide the desired racemic compound I-240. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=419.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 236

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-241a and I-241b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 235 except that 1-methyl-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole was used in place of 1-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole as the boronoate in the first step. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 237

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-242a and I-242b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 188 except that racemic compound I-75 was used in place of compound I-14 as starting material. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=406.3 m/z. Activity: A

Example 238

2-(4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-ylamino)ethanol I-243a and I-243b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedures: racemic 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-10 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in n-butanol (0.57 M) followed by the addition of (tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy)methanamine (1.2 equiv) and sodium carbonate (2.5 equiv). The reaction was sealed and heated in a microwave reaction for 1 h at 150° C. after which point there was very little product formation by LC/MS analysis. The reaction was then resealed and heated for an additional 24 h at 120° C. in the microwave after which it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and tert-butylmethyl ether. The aqueous layer was washed with tert-butylmethyl ether (2×) and the combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrate to provide a orange solid that was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexane) to provide the desired silyl ether. This compound (1.0 equiv) was then dissolved in methanol (0.02 M) and cooled to 0° C. in an ice bath. Acetyl chloride (50 equiv) was added dropwise after which the reaction was allowed to stir for min at 0° C. The solvent and remaining acetyl chloride was then removed under a stream of nitrogen after which the crude material was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/methanol) to provide racemic I-243. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=300.2 m/z. Activity: B

Example 239

2-((4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-yl)(methyl)amino)acetic acid I-244a and I-244b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedure: racemic 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-10 was converted to the corresponding 3-amino-4,5-dihydroisoxazole by reacting it with sarcosine ethyl ester under the same conditions as in Example 238. The ethyl ester was then hydrolyzed using the analogous conditions as in Example 119 to provide a mixture of racemic I-244. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M−H]−=327.5 m/z. Activity: B

Example 240

2-(4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-ylamino)alcohol I-245a and I-245b were prepared in 1 step according to the following procedure: racemic 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-10 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in n-butanol (0.64 M) followed by the addition of (S)-2-amino-1-phenylethanol (1.2 equiv) and sodium carbonate (2.5 equiv). The reaction is the sealed and heated in an oil bath to 120° C. for 18 h after which it allowed to cool and then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and tert-butylmethyl ether. The aqueous layer was washed with tert-butylmethyl ether (2×) and the combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrate to provide a orange solid that was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient toluene/hexanes to toluene/ethyl acetate) to provide racemic I-245 as a white solid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=374.20 m/z. Activity: C

Example 241

2-(4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-ylamino)alcohol I-246a and I-246b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 240 except that racemic 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-14 was used in place of 3-bromo-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-10 as starting material and that (R)-2-amino-1-phenylethanol was used in place of (S)-2-amino-1-phenylethanol. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=365.6 m/z. Activity: C

Example 242

3-(phenylthio)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-248a and I-248b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedure: N,N-dibromoformaldoxime (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran. Thiophenol (2.0 equiv) was added followed by sodium hydride (1.98 equiv). After stirring for 1 h, the reaction is concentrated and purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide the desired diphenyl hydroxycarbonimidodithioate I-247. The dithioate (1.0 equiv) is then redissolved in acetonitrile (1.0 M) followed by the addition of 1-(trifluoromethoxy)-4-vinylbenzene (2.4 equiv), silver nitrate (1.0 equiv) and potassium carbonate (1.0 equiv). The reaction was allowed to stir for 3d at room temperature after which point it was concentrated and purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes) to provide racemic 3-(phenylthio)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-248. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=339.9 m/z. Activity: C

Example 243

3-(phenylsulfinyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-249a and I-249b were prepared by the oxidation of racemic 3-(phenylthio)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-248. 3-(Phenylthio)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-248 (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in ethanol (0.15 M) followed by the addition of excess hydrogen peroxide in water (30% by weight, >50 equiv) and 1N HCl (0.29 M). The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 14 h after which it was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and methylene chloride. The water layer was extracted with methylene chloride (1×), dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated to provide crude product that was recrystallized from hexanes to provide the desired racemic 3-(phenylsulfinyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-249. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=355.5 m/z. Activity: C

Example 244

3-(phenylsulfonyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-250a and I-250b were prepared by the oxidation of racemic 3-(phenylsulfinyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-249. 3-(Phenylsulfinyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-249 is dissolved in methylene chloride (0.03 M). m-Chloroperbenzoic acid (77% by weight, 2.95 equiv) are added in two portions and the reaction is allowed to stir at room temperature for 14 h after which it is transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and methylene chloride. The organic layer is washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate (2×), dried over magnesium sulfate, and concentrated to provide crude solid that is recrystallized from methylene chloride/hexanes to provide the desired racemic 3-(phenylsulfonyl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-250. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=371.7 m/z. Activity: C

Example 245

3-(phenylthio)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-251a and I-251b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 242 except that methyl 4-mercaptobenzoate was used in place of thiophenol to form the requisite hydroxycarbonimidodithioate. The resulting methyl ester cycloadduct was then hydrolyzed using the analogous conditions as in example 94 to provide racemic 3-(phenylthio)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-251. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=384.1 m/z. Activity: C

Example 246

N-ethyl-N-phenyl-4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-amine I-253a and I-253b were prepared in 2 steps according to the following procedure: N,N-dibromoformaldoxime (1.05 equiv) was dissolved in acetonitrile. Thiophenol (1.0 equiv) and N-ethyl aniline (1.0 equiv) were added and the reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 2.5 h after which point triethylamine (5.0 equiv) is added. After stirring for 1 h, the solids that have now precipitated out of the reaction are filtered and the filtrate is concentrated and purified directly by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes with 1% triethylamine) to provide the desired carbamimidothioate I-252. The carbamimidothioate (1.0 equiv) is then redissolved in acetonitrile (1.0 M) followed by the addition of 1-(trifluoromethoxy)-4-vinylbenzene (2.4 equiv), silver nitrate (1.07 equiv) and potassium carbonate (1.17 equiv). The reaction was allowed to stir for 1d at room temperature after which point it was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes with 1% triethylamine) to provide racemic 4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-amine I-253. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=352.1 m/z. Activity: C

Example 247

N-methyl-N-phenyl-4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-amine I-255a and I-255b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedure: N,N-dibromoformaldoxime (1.05 equiv) was dissolved in acetonitrile. Thiophenol (1.0 equiv) and 4-(methylamino)benzoic acid methyl ester (1.0 equiv) were added after which point triethylamine (3.0 equiv) is added in 3 portions. After stirring for 3 h, the reaction was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and methylene chloride. The organic layer was washed with 1N HCl (2×), dried over magnesium sulfate, concentrated and purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes with 0.5% triethyl amine followed by gradient methanol/methylene chloride with 0.5% triethyl amine) to provide the desired carbamimidothioate I-254. The carbamimidothioate (1.0 equiv) is then redissolved in acetonitrile (1.0 M) followed by the addition of 1-(trifluoromethoxy)-4-vinylbenzene (1.8 equiv), silver nitrate (2.3 equiv) and potassium carbonate (2.1 equiv). The reaction was allowed to stir for 1d at room temperature after which point it was purified by flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes with 0.5% triethylamine followed by gradient methanol/methylene chloride with 0.5% triethylamine. The resulting racemic methyl ester cycloadduct was then hydrolyzed using the analogous conditions as in Example 94 to provide racemic N-methyl-N-phenyl-4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-amine I-255. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=381.5 m/z. Activity: C

Example 248

3-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-256a and I-256b were prepared using the analogous procedure as Example 238 except that pyrrolidine was used in place of (S)-2-amino-1-phenylethanol. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+^(=310.3) m/z. Activity: C

Example 249

3-(1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-257a and I-257b were prepared in 1 step from compound I-10 and 1-methyl-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-5-ol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=403.7 m/z. Activity: B

Example 250

3-(phenoxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-258a and I-258b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-14 and 3-(1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl)phenol using Method 5. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=392.4 m/z. Activity: A

Example 251

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-259a and I-259b were prepared using the analogous procedure to Example 152 except that racemic compound I-170 was used as the starting acid. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=390.7 m/z. Activity: A

Example 252

4,5-dihydroisoxazol-3-yl acetate I-260a and I-260b were prepared in 3 steps according to the following procedures: racemic bromoisoxazole I-10 was (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (1.0 M). 1N Sodium hydroxide solution is added (4.0 equiv) followed by allyl alcohol (45 equiv). The reaction was sealed and heated to 60° C. for 3 h. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool and then transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed water and brine, drive over sodium sulfate and concentrated under vacuum to provide crude material which was purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes). The resulting allyl ether (1.0 equiv) was then dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (0.2 M). Formic acid (5.0 equiv) was added followed by palladium tetrakis (10 mol %) after which the reaction was allowed to stir for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and purified using flash silica gel chromatography (gradient ethyl acetate/hexanes). The resulting isoxazolidin-3-one (1.0 equiv) was dissolved in methylene chloride (0.3 M) after which N,N-dimethyamino pyridine (1.0 equiv) and acetic anhydride (1.0 equiv) were added. After stirring at room temperature for 14 h, the reaction was transferred to a separatory funnel with excess water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with 1N HCl and brine, dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide the desired racemic acetate I-260. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=297.8 m/z. Activity: D

Example 253

3-(pyridin-3-yloxy)-4,5-dihydroisoxazole I-261a and I-261b were prepared in 1 step from racemic compound I-75 and 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol using Method 5 after 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ol is first prepared from 6-(methylthio)pyridin-3-ylboronic acid using Method 11. These compounds can be separated using chiral HPLC methods known in the art. For example, see chiral HPLC Method disclosed herein. [M+H]+=386.2 m/z. Activity: A

Example 254

Inhibition of Human FAAH

Human FAAH Preparation: COS-7 cells were split the day before, 1:5 into 150 mm x mm cell culture dishes (Corning Inc., Cat. No. 430599). Transient transfection took place at 30-40% confluency according to FuGENE 6 Transfection Reagent (Roche, Cat. No. 11814 443 001).

Transfection Procedure: The FuGENE transfection 6 reagent (45 uL) was added to 1410 μL of media (DMEM, serum free without pen/strep) in a 15 mL conical tube and incubated at room temp for 5 minutes, followed by the addition of FAAH plasmid DNA (15 μg) (OriGene Cat. No. TC119221, Genbank Accession No. NM_(—)001441.1, 0.67 ug/uL) and a further incubation of 15 minutes at room temperature. The resulting solution was added into one dish of 30-40% confluent COS-7 cells in a drop-wise manner. The COS-7 cell dish was subsequently incubated for 48 hours. The cells are then harvested.

Harvest procedure: Media was aspirated from the dishes and the cells rinsed with 10 mL PBS. The PBS was removed and 3 mL of PBS added to the dish. The dish was scraped to resuspend the cells, and the subsequent cell suspension collected into a 15 mL conical tube. The cells were pelleted by centrifugation at 1200 rpm for 5 minutes in a bench top centrifuge. PBS was removed and the cell pellet snap frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at −80° C.

COS-7 cells —FAAH purification:

-   -   (1) Fractionation: Frozen cell pellets from transient         transfections were thawed on ice and resuspended in 12.5 mM         Hepes pH 8.0, 100 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA (10 mL/0.2 g cell pellet).         The pellets were dounce homogenized and then sonicated to         produce cell extract. The cell extract was subsequently         centrifuged at 1000 g to remove cellular debris. The pellet was         discarded and the supernatant centrifuged at 13,000 g for 20         minutes. The pellet contained membrane bound FAAH. The         supernatant was discarded and the pellet resolubilized.     -   (2) Re-solubilization: The fraction of interest, (13,000 g,         membrane fraction) was re-suspended in 2.3 mL re-suspension         buffer (20 mM Hepes pH 7.8, 10% v/v Glycerol, 1 mM EDTA, 1%         Triton X-100) and the sample incubated on ice for 1 hour and         then centrifuged to remove any particulate matter. The         supernatant containing solubilized human FAAH was aliquoted and         snap frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at −80° C. until use.     -   (3) Characterization: Protein Concentration determined by         Bradford assay.         -   SDS gel and Western blot to confirm presence of FAAH         -   FAAH activity assay         -   K_(m) determination-96-well assay         -   Linear dependence—96-well assay         -   Standard compound Ki determination—384-well assay

Human FAAH assay; Experimental Protocol: A 0.1 mg/mL Human FAAH solution was made up in FAAH reaction buffer, and 24 ul pipeted into a 384 well plate. To this was added 1 μL of a 3 fold serially diluted inhibitor from a DMSO stock solution. The FAAH solution and inhibitor were incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature. The FAAH reaction was initiated by the addition of 25 μL of 40 μM AMC Arachidonoyl Amide in FAAH reaction buffer, yielding a final reaction human FAAH preparation concentration of 0.05 mg/ml and AMC-Arachidonoyl substrate concentration of 20 μM, reaction volume 50 μL. The reaction was allowed to proceed for 4 hours at room temperature. The reaction was stopped by the addition of 25 μL 12 μM a-ketoheterocycle (Cayman Chemicals, catalogue #10435). The microtiter plate was read in the envision plate reader.

The raw fluorescence was plotted on the y axis and the inhibitor concentration on the x axis to give a dose response inhibition curve. The data was fitted to a single site competitive inhibition equation, fixing the Km for the human enzyme to 12 μM and 9 μM respectively.

Other assays which can be used to determine the inhibition of FAAH by the compounds of the present invention include: (1) a fluorescence-based assay for fatty acid amide hydrolase compatible with high-throughput screening as described in Manjunath et al., Analytical Biochemistry (2005) 343:143-151; and (2) a high-throughput screening for the discovery of inhibitors of fatty acid amide hydrolase using a microsome-based fluorescent assay. Wang et al., Biomolecular Screening (2006) 1-9.

Example 255

Evidence for Covalent Complex Formation between Serine-241 of FAAH and Isoxazolines

Treatment of rat FAAH protein with the active site-directed irreversible inhibitor methoxy arachidonyl fluorophosphonate results in a crystal structure wherein methoxy arachidonyl phosphonate is covalently bound to the side chain of Ser-241 (Bracey et al., Science (2002) 298:1793-1796).

Based on this data, it is hypothesized that the isoxazoline compounds of the present invention form covalent complexes with the nucleophilic side chain of Ser-241. This hypothesis is consistent with the kinetic data, with the proposed binding involving nucleophilic attack of the isoxazoline electrophile by the active site Ser-241, resulting in the elimination of the leaving group from the cytosolic port, and the subsequent formation of a covalent enzyme-isoxazoline adduct. Recovery of activity would subsequently involve a deacylation reaction, which would occur inefficiently, if at all, for the covalent enzyme-isoxazoline adduct.

Recovery of activity experiments were performed via a jump dilution method which involved rapidly diluting the enzyme-inhibitor complex 5-fold below its apparent Ki, and measuring activity as a function of time. Little or no enzyme activity was regained over a period of two hours, indicating essentially irreversible inhibition, or a very slowly hydrolysable complex, supporting the above hypothesis.

OTHER EMBODIMENTS

Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims. 

We claim:
 1. A compound of the formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof.
 2. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
 3. A compound of the formula:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof.
 4. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
 5. The compound:

or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof.
 6. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of claim 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable form thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.
 7. The compound of claim 5, wherein the compound is a (R)-enantiomer.
 8. The compound of claim 5, wherein the compound is the (R)-enantiomer having an enantiomeric purity greater than 75%.
 9. The compound of claim 5, wherein the compound is the (R)-enantiomer having an enantiomeric purity greater than 90%.
 10. The compound of claim 5, wherein the compound is the (R)-enantiomer having an enantiomeric purity greater than 95%. 